Convertible (2019) - Car MINI - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Convertible Car
Brand	MINI
Model Year	2019
Model Variant	Cooper Convertible
Engine Type	1.5L 3-cylinder turbocharged petrol
Transmission	6-speed automatic or 6-speed manual
Drive Type	Front-wheel drive
Length	3821 mm
Width	1727 mm
Height	1415 mm
Wheelbase	2495 mm
Curb Weight	1290 kg
Fuel Type	Petrol (unleaded)
Fuel Tank Capacity	44 L
Combined Fuel Consumption	6.0 L/100 km
Roof Type	Electric fabric soft top
Tire Size	205/45 R17
Safety Features	Front and side airbags, ABS, ESC, run-flat tires
Maintenance Interval	Oil change every 15,000 km or 12 months
Spare Parts	Genuine MINI parts recommended

Frequently Asked Questions - Convertible (2019) MINI

How do I operate the soft top roof?

The soft top can be opened or closed using the button on the center console. Ensure the vehicle is stationary and the trunk divider is properly positioned. The operation takes about 18 seconds and can be done at speeds up to 30 km/h.

What tire pressure should I use?

Recommended tire pressure for 205/45 R17 tires is 2.4 bar (35 psi) front and 2.5 bar (36 psi) rear for partial load, and 2.7 bar (39 psi) front and 2.9 bar (42 psi) rear for full load. Check the sticker on the driver's door pillar for exact values.

What type of engine oil is required?

Use fully synthetic engine oil with BMW Longlife-04 or -12 FE specification, viscosity 0W-20 or 5W-30. The capacity is approximately 4.2 liters. Always check the oil level with the dipstick.

Where is the fuse box located?

The fuse box is located behind a cover on the passenger side of the glove compartment. Pull the cover downwards to access the fuses. A fuse diagram is printed on the cover or in the manual.

How do I pair my phone via Bluetooth?

Go to the infotainment system menu, select 'Phone', then 'Bluetooth' and 'Add new device'. Ensure your phone is discoverable. Select the MINI from the list and confirm the pairing code. The system supports audio streaming and hands-free calls.

What are the common dashboard warning lights?

Common lights include the check engine light (yellow), tire pressure warning (yellow), battery charge (red), and brake pad wear (yellow). Refer to the manual for specific meanings and actions. If a red light appears, stop safely and contact service.

How do I maintain the soft top?

Clean the soft top with a mild soap and water, using a soft brush. Do not use automatic car washes or high-pressure washers. Apply a fabric protectant every few months to maintain water repellency. Ensure the roof is fully dry before retracting.

Does the car have a spare tire?

The MINI Convertible is equipped with run-flat tires, so no spare tire is provided. In case of a puncture, you can drive up to 80 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h. A tire repair kit may be included in the trunk.

What fuel grade should I use?

Use premium unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 95 RON or higher. Using lower octane fuel can reduce performance and fuel efficiency. Do not add any fuel additives.

What is the recommended service interval?

The vehicle uses a Condition Based Service (CBS) system. Oil change intervals are typically 15,000 km or 12 months, while brake fluid should be changed every 3 years. The service indicator in the car will prompt when maintenance is due.

USER MANUAL Convertible (2019) MINI

OWNER'S MANUAL.

MINI CONVERTIBLE.

WELCOME TO MINI.

OWNER'S MANUAL. MINI CONVERTIBLE.

Thank you for choosing a MINI.

The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:

Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your MINI.

Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

NOTES

Information....10

QUICK REFERENCE

Your MINI at a glance....22

AT A GLANCE

Cockpit....38

Central Information Display (CID)....42

General settings....47

Owner's Manual media....56

CONTROLS

Opening and closing....60

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel....83

Transporting children safely....93

Driving....97

Displays.... 120

Lights....137

Safety....143

Driving stability control systems....164

Driving comfort.... 169

Climate control....189

Interior equipment....198

Storage compartments....205

Cargo area....208

i DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving....216

Saving fuel....221

ENTERTAINMENT

General information....230

Tone....232

Radio....234

Audio....242

COMMUNICATION

Telephone....248

MINI Connected.... 252

MOBILITY

Refueling....258

Fuel....260

Wheels and tires....262

Engine compartment....283

Engine oil....286

Coolant....290

Maintenance....292

Replacing components.... 294

Breakdown assistance.... 305

Care....313

REFERENCE

Technical data....322

Appendix....325

License Texts and Certifications....326

Everything from A to Z....350

Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.

US English ID5 VI/18, 07 18 490

Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

NOTES

Information 10

Information

Using this Owner's Manual

Orientation

The fastest way to find information on a particular topic is by using the index.

An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

Additional sources of information

Dealer's service center

A dealer's service center will be glad to answer questions at any time.

Internet

The Owner's Manual and general Information about MINI, for example on technology, are available on the Internet: www.mini-usa.com.

MINI Motorer's Guide app

The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app for iOS or Android in the respective Store.

MINI Driver's Guide Web

Driver's Guide Web shows the most suitable information for the selected vehicle. If possible, only equipment and functions that are actually installed in the vehicle will be explained. Driver's Guide Web can be displayed in any current browser.

Symbols and displays

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Sym- Meaning bol

Precautions that must be followed in order to avoid the possibility of injury to yourself and to others as well as serious damage to the vehicle.

Measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

"..." Control Display texts used to select individual functions.

Action steps

Action steps to be carried out are presented as numbered list. The steps must be carried out in the defined order.

1. First action step.

2. Second action step.

Enumerations

Enumerations without mandatory order or alternative possibilities are presented as list with bullet points.

- First possibility.

- Second possibility.

Symbols on vehicle components

This symbol on a vehicle component indicates that further information on the component is available in the Owner's Manual.

Vehicle features and options

This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes and illustrates features and functions that are not available in a vehicle, for example because of the selected optional features or the country-specific version.

This also applies to safety-related functions and systems.

When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Your dealer's service center is happy to answer any questions that you may have about the features and options applicable to your vehicle.

Status of the Owner's Manual

Basic information

The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the features described in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

For Your Own Safety

Manufacturer

The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, BMW AG.

Intended use

Follow the following when using the vehicle:

• Owner's Manual.
• Information on the vehicle. Do not remove stickers.
• Technical vehicle data.
• The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the vehicle is driven.
  – Vehicle documents and statutory documents.

Warranty

Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration requirements applying in the country of first delivery, also known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing operating conditions and registration require-

ments. If your vehicle does not comply with the homologation requirements in a certain country you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there. Further information on warranty is available from a dealer's service center.

Maintenance and repairs

WARNING

Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of the radar sensors and thereby result in a safety risk. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Have paint-work or paintwork repairs on bumpers of vehicles with radar sensors performed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop only.

Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair work.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to a MINI dealer's service center. If you choose to use another service facility, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends use of a facility that performs work, for instance maintenance and repair, according to MINI specifications with properly trained personnel, referred to in this Owner's Manual as "another qualified service center or repair shop".

If work is performed improperly, for instance maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent damage and related safety risks.

Parts and accessories

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends the use of parts and accessory products approved by the manufacturer of the MINI.

Approved parts and accessories, and advice on their use and installation are available from a MINI dealer's service center.

MINI parts and accessories were tested by the manufacturer of the MINI for their safety and suitability in MINI vehicles.

The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants genuine MINI parts and accessories.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with MINI vehicles without presenting a safety hazard, even if a country-specific official approval was issued. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate whether these products are suitable for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.

California Proposition 65 Warning

California law requires vehicle manufacturers provide the following warning:

WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin

by washing thoroughly with soap and water. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

WARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

Service and warranty

We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the following warranties:

• New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
  – Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
  – Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
• Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
  – California Emission Control System Limited Warranty.

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating conditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.

Maintenance

Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for required maintenance measures:

• MINI Maintenance system.
  – Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models.
• Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in serious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Data memory

General information

Electronic control devices are installed in the vehicle. Electronic control units process data they receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or exchange with each other. Some control units are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or provide assistance during driving, for instance driver assistance

systems. Furthermore, control devices facilitate comfort or infotainment functions.

Information about stored or exchanged data can be requested from the manufacturer of the vehicle, in a separate booklet, for example.

Personal reference

Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the country, the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehicle identification number, license plate and corresponding authorities. In addition, there are other options to track data collected in the vehicle to the driver or vehicle owner, e.g. via utilized services.

Operating data in the vehicle

Control units process data to operate the vehicle.

For example, this includes:

- Status messages for the vehicle and its individual components, e.g., wheel rotational speed, wheel speed, deceleration, transverse acceleration, engaged safety belt indicator.

- Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain sensor signals.

The processed data is only processed in the vehicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not stored beyond the operating period.

Electronic components, e.g. control units and ignition keys, contain components for storing technical information. Information about the vehicle condition, component usage, maintenance requirements or faults can be stored temporarily or permanently.

This information generally records the state of a component, a module, a system, or the environment, for instance:

- Operating states of system components, e.g., fill levels, tire inflation pressure, battery status.

- Malfunctions and faults in important system components, for instance lights and brakes.

- Responses by the vehicle to special situations such as airbag deployment or engagement of the driving stability control systems.

- Information on vehicle-damaging events.

The data is required to perform the control device functions. Furthermore, it also serves to recognize and correct malfunctions, and helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.

The majority of this data is transient and is only processed within the vehicle itself. Only a small share of the data is stored event-related in event or fault memories.

When servicing, for instance during repairs, service processes, warranty cases, and quality assurance measures, this technical information can be read out from the vehicle together with the vehicle identification number.

A dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop can read out the information. The socket for OBD On-board Diagnosis required by law in the vehicle is used to read out the data.

The data is collected, processed, and used by the relevant organizations in the service network. The data documents technical conditions of the vehicle, helps with the identification of the fault, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement.

Furthermore, the manufacturer has product monitoring duties to meet in line with product liability law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle manufacturer needs technical data from the vehicle. The data from the vehicle

can also be used to check customer claims for warranty and guaranty.

Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be reset when a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop performs repair or servicing work.

Data entry and data transfer into the vehicle

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort and individual settings can be stored in the vehicle and modified or reset at any time.

For example, this includes:

• Settings for the seat and steering wheel positions.
• Suspension and climate control settings. If necessary, data can be transferred to the entertainment and communication system of the vehicle, e.g. via smartphone.

This includes the following depending on the respective equipment:

• Multimedia data such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system.
• Address book data for use in conjunction with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system.

- Entered navigation destinations.

- Data on the use of Internet services.

This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is found on a device that has been connected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at any time.

This data is only transmitted to third parties upon personal request as part of the use of online services. This depends on the selected settings for the use of the services.

Incorporation of mobile end devices

Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile devices connected to the vehicle, for instance smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle control elements.

The sound and picture from the mobile device can be played back and displayed through the multimedia system. Certain information is transferred to the mobile device at the same time. Depending on the type of incorporation, this includes, for instance position data and other general vehicle information. This optimizes the way in which selected apps, for instance navigation or music playback, work.

There is no further interaction between the mobile device and the vehicle, for instance active access to vehicle data.

How the data will be processed further is determined by the provider of the particular app being used. The extent of the possible settings depends on the respective app and the operating system of the mobile device.

Services

General information

If the vehicle has a wireless network connection, this enables data to be exchanged between the vehicle and other systems. The wireless network connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devices brought into the vehicle, for instance smartphones. This wireless network connection enables 'online functions' to be used. These include online services and apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.

Services from the vehicle manufacturer

Where online services from the vehicle manufacturer are concerned, the corresponding functions are described in the ap-

propriate place, for instance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's website. The relevant legal information pertaining to data protection is provided there too. Personal data may be used to perform online services. Data is exchanged over a secure connection, for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose.

Any collection, processing, and use of personal data above and beyond that needed to provide the services must always be based on a legal permission, contractual arrangement or consent. It is also possible to activate or deactivate the data connection as a whole. That is, with the exception of functions and services required by law such as Assist systems.

Services from other providers

When using online services from other providers, these services are the responsibility of the relevant provider and subject to their data privacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged during this process. Information on the way in which personal data is collected and used in relation to services from third parties, the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be obtained from the relevant service provider.

Event Data Recorder EDR

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened.
• How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data, for instance name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Vehicle identification number

Engine compartment

The vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

Type label

The vehicle identification number can be found on the type label, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

Windshield

The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers

The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone [phone].

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain

other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline [phone]. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

QUICK REFERENCE

Your MINI at a glance 22

Your MINI at a glance

Opening and closing

Buttons on the remote control

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Unlocking the tailgate

4 Panic mode

Unlocking the vehicle

Press the button on the remote control.

Depending on the settings, either only the driver's door or all vehicle access points are unlocked.

If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the button on the remote control again to unlock the other vehicle access points.

Press and hold the button on the remote control after unlocking.

The windows and the sliding sun roof integrated into the convertible top are opened, as long as the button on the remote control is pressed.

With Comfort Access:

If close to the vehicle, the convertible top can also be opened.

Press the button on the remote control again after the sliding sun roof integrated into the convertible top

is fully opened. Press and hold the button until the convertible top is fully opened and locked.

Releasing the button or leaving the vicinity of the vehicle stops the motion.

Locking the vehicle

Press button on the remote control.

All vehicle access points are locked.

When the remote control is used near the vehicle, it can be used to close the convertible top and windows.

Hold down the remote control button until the closing operation is completed.

Releasing the button or leaving the vicinity of the vehicle stops the motion.

Buttons for the central locking system

Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking

Pressing the button locks the vehicle if the front doors are closed.

Unlocking

Pressing the button unlocks the vehicle.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press button on the remote control and hold for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Comfort Access

Concept

The vehicle can be accessed without activating the remote control.

All you need to do is to have the remote control with you, such as in your pants pocket.

The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.

Unlocking the vehicle

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button.

Locking the vehicle

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button.

Unlocking the tailgate

Unlock the vehicle and press the button on the tailgate.

- Unlock the vehicle and press the button on the tailgate.

- If carrying the remote control, press the button on the tailgate.

Press and hold button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the setting, the doors may be unlocked.

Convertible top with integrated sliding sun roof

Overview

Sliding sun roof

Press the switch backward, until the desired position is reached or the sliding sun roof is fully open.

Press the switch forward, until the desired position is reached or the sliding sun roof is closed.

Convertible top

Press the switch backward, until the sliding sun roof is open.

Press the switch backward again. The windows are rolled

down, and the convertible top opens as longs as the switch is pressed. After the convertible top is completely open, the switch can be held or pressed again briefly in order to raise the windows.

Press and hold switch forward. The windows are lowered, the convertible top closes and the windows are raised again as long as the switch is pressed.

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Manually adjustable seats

1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt

Adjusting the head restraint

Height

• To raise: push the head restraint up.
• To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

1 Settings
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out

Adjusting the steering wheel

In four directions

1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating position.
3. Fold the lever back up.

Entering the rear

1. Pull lever up to the stop.

1. Fold backrest forward.
2. Push the seat forward.

Original position

1. Push the seat back into the original position.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.

Displays and control elements

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Low beams, fog lights
2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn signal
3 Instrument cluster
4 Washer/wiper system

Indicator/warning lights

Instrument cluster

The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Driver's door

1 All side windows
2 Power windows
3 Exterior mirrors

All around the selector lever

1 Selector lever
2 Controller with buttons
3 Parking brake

Central Information Display (CID)

Concept

The Central Information Display (CID) combines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller.

Controller

General information

The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

MENU	Press once: call up main menu. Press twice: open recently used menus.
BACK	Open the previous display.
OPTION	Open the Options menu.
AUDIO	Open the Audio menu.
	Opens the Phone menu.

Driving

Starting and stopping the engine

Ignition on/off

- On: press the Start/Stop button.

Most of the indicator/ warning lights light up for a varied length of time.

• Off: press the Start/Stop button again. All indicator lights go out.
• Radio-ready state: when the ignition is switched off, press the ON/OFF button on the radio or when the engine is running, press the Start/Stop button.

Some electronic systems/power consumers remain ready for operation.

Starting/stopping the engine

Steptronic transmission: starting

1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: starting

1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neutral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Steptronic transmission: switching off

1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the parking brake.
2. Engage selector lever position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: switching off

1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the Start/Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.

Auto Start/Stop function

Steptronic transmission: switches the engine off automatically while stationary to save fuel. The engine starts automatically when the brake pedal is released.

Manual transmission: switches the engine off automatically while stationary to save fuel. As soon as the clutch pedal is depressed, the engine starts automatically.

Parking brake

Applying

The lever automatically engages after being pulled up.

Releasing

Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide the lever down.

Manual transmission

Shifting

When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push the gearshift lever to the right in order to prevent inadvertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear.

Reverse gear

Select only when the vehicle is stationary. To overcome the resistance push the gear-shift lever dynamically to the left and engage reverse gear with a forward shifting movement.

Steptronic transmission

Selector lever positions

Parking position P.

Reverse R.

Neutral N.

Drive mode D.

Engage selector lever position P or R only when the vehicle is stationary.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a drive mode or reverse, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Selector lever lock

A lock prevents an inadvertent change from selector lever position P to another selector lever position and, depending on the transmission version, inadvertent switching to selector lever position P or R.

To release the lock: with the brake pedal depressed, press the button on the front or side of the selector lever.

Steptronic transmission, Sport and manual mode

Sport program:

Press the selector lever to the left out of selector lever position D.

Manual mode:

- To shift down: press the selector lever forward.

- To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.

High beams, headlight flasher, turn signal, roadside parking light

High beams, headlight flasher

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

- High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on.

- High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Turn signal

- On: press the lever past the resistance point.

- Off: lightly tap the lever to the resistance point.

- Off: press the lever past the resistance point in the opposite direction.

- Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the lever up or down.

- Brief signaling: press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Canada: roadside parking light

Illuminate the vehicle on one side.

• On: with the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds.
• Off: briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Lights and lighting

Light functions

Symbol Function

Front fog lights.

Automatic headlight control.

Lights off.

Daytime running lights.

Parking lights.

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Washer/wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached.

• Resting position of the wipers: position 0.
  – Rain sensor: position 1.
• Normal wiper speed: position 2.
• Fast wiper speed: position 3.

Brief wipe and switching off

Press the lever down.

• Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position.
• Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position.

Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

To activate: press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1.

To deactivate: press the lever back into the standard position.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Canada: wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Switching on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance point.

• Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
• Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point.

Brief wipe and switching off

Press the lever down.

• To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
• To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
• Brief wipe: press down once.

Rain sensor

Activating/deactivating

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Climate control

Air conditioner

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Recirculated-air mode.

Control the air flow, manual.

Control the manual air distribution.

Windshield defroster.

Automatic climate control

Button Function

Temperature.

Air conditioning.

Maximum cooling.

AUTO program.

Button Function

	Recirculated-air mode.
	Automatic recirculated-air control AUC/recirculated-air mode.
	Control the air flow, manual.
	Air distribution, manual.
	Defrost and defog the windows.
	Windshield defroster.
	Rear window defroster.

Infotainment

Radio

Control elements

1 Change waveband
2 Changing the entertainment source
3 Sound output on/off, volume

4 Change station/track
5 Programmable memory buttons

Pairing the mobile phone

After the mobile phone is paired once with the vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using the Central Information Display (CID), the steering wheel buttons and spoken instructions.

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is displayed on the Control Display.

1. To perform additional steps on the mobile phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's manual: e.g., search for or connect the Bluetooth device or a new device.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.

1. Depending on the mobile device, a control number is displayed or the control number must be entered.

- Compare the control number displayed on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the device.

Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display.

- Enter and confirm the same control number on the device and via the Central Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed in the device list.

The mobile phone is connected and will appear at the top of the list of mobile phones.

Using the phone

Accepting a call

Incoming call can be accepted via the Central Information Display (CID) or the button on the steering wheel.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

"Accept"

Via the button on the steering wheel

Press button.

Dialing a number

1. "Communication"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the numbers individually.
4. Select the symbol.

Refueling

Refueling

Fuel cap

1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge and open it.

1. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

2. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

Gasoline

For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without metallic additives.

Information on the recommended fuel grade can be found in the Owner's Manual.

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure specifications

The tire inflation pressure values can be found on the sign on the door pillar.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and correct it as needed:

• At least twice a month.
• Before embarking on an extended trip.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Electronic oil measurement

Requirements

A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of driving. During a

shorter trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed.

Displaying the engine oil level

On the radio:

1. MENU the button.
2. "Vehicle Info"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Engine oil level"
   The engine oil level is displayed.

Adding engine oil

General information

Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehicle before engine oil is added.

Adding

Only add engine oil when the message is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Observe the quantity to be added in the message.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Observe recommended engine oil types.

Providing assistance

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the Control Display.

Breakdown assistance

MINI Roadside Assistance

This service can be reached around the clock in many countries.

1. "MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"
   The contact to the MINI Roadside Assistance is established.
   A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.

AT A GLANCE

Cockpit 38

Central Information Display (CID) 42

General settings 47

Owner's Manual media 56

Cockpit

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle,

e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows, all 73
2 Power windows, individual 73
3 Exterior mirror operation 89
4 Buttons of the central locking sys- tem 66

5 Lights

Front fog lights 140

Light switch 137

Lights off

Daytime running lights 139

Parking lights 137

Low beams 137

Automatic headlight control 138

Cornering light 139

High-beam Assistant 139

Instrument lighting 141

6 Steering wheel buttons, left

Camera-based cruise control on/off 169

Cruise control on/off 175

Cruise control: store speed

Pausing, continuing cruise control

Cruise control: increase speed

Cruise control: reduce speed

Camera-based cruise control: reduce distance

Camera-based cruise control: increase distance

7 Steering column stalk, left

Turn signal 103

High beams, head-light flasher 103

High-beam Assistant 139

Roadside parking lights 138

Onboard Computer 130

8 Instrument cluster 120

9 Steering column stalk, right

Windshield wipers 107

Rain sensor 108

Cleaning windows 105

10 Steering wheel buttons, right

Telephone 248

Confirm the selection 130

Selection back 130

Selection next 130

Increase volume

Reduce volume

11 Horn, entire surface

12 Adjust the steering wheel 91

13 Unlock hood 284

In the vicinity of the center console

1 Hazard warning system 305

Intelligent Safety 155

2 Control Display 42
3 Radio/Multimedia
4 Glove compartment 205
5 Climate control 189
6 PDC Park Distance Con-

trol 177

Rearview camera 180

Parking assistant 184

Auto Start/Stop function 100

Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off 97

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 164

MINI Driving Modes switch 166

7 Steptronic transmission selector lever 112

Manual transmission selector lever 111

8 Controller with buttons 44
9 Parking brake 102

All around the interior mirror

1 Emergency Request,

SOS 306

2 Indicator light, front-seat pas-

senger airbag 146

3 Reading lights 141

4 Ambient light 141

5 Convertible top 76

6 Interior lights 141

Central Information Display (CID)

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Concept

The Central Information Display (CID) combines the functions of a multitude of switches. These functions can be operated via the Controller.

Safety information

WARNING

Operating the integrated information systems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Input and display

Letters and numbers

Depending on the menu, you can switch between entering upper and lower case letters and numbers:

Symbol Function

abc or ABC	Change between capital and lower-case letters.
Insert blank space.
Use voice activation.
OK Confirm entry.

Without navigation system

Entry comparison

When entering names and addresses, the choice is narrowed down with every letter entered and letters may be added automatically.

Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle.

Only those letters are offered during entry for which data is available.

Activating/deactivating the functions

Several menu items are preceded by a checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether the function is activated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.

Function is activated.

Function is deactivated.

Status information

General information

The status field can be found in the upper area of the Control Display. Status information is displayed in the form of symbols.

Radio

Symbol Meaning

HD) HD Radio station is being received.

sxm Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call.

Missed call.

Signal strength of cellular net- work. Symbol flashes: network search.

Cellular network is not available.

Roaming is active.

SMS text message received.

Message received.

Reminder.

Sending not possible.

Entertainment

Symbol Meaning

Bluetooth audio.

USB audio interface.

Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning

⚠️ Check Control message.

The sound output has been switched off.

Checking the current vehicle position.

Control elements

Overview

1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons

Control Display

General information

To clean the Control Display, follow the care instructions, refer to page 317.

In the case of very high temperatures on the Control Display, for instance due to intense solar radiation, the brightness may be reduced down to complete deactivation. Once the temperature is reduced, for instance through shade or air conditioning, the normal functions are restored.

Safety information

NOTICE

Objects in the area in the front of the Control Display can shift and damage the Control Display. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not place objects in the area in front of the Control Display.

Switching on/off automatically

The Control Display is switched on automatically after unlocking.

In certain situations, the Control Display is switched off automatically, for instance if no operation is performed on the vehicle for several minutes.

Switching on/off manually

The Control Display can also be switched off manually.

1. Press button.

2. "Turn off control display"

Press the Controller or any button on the Controller to switch it back on again.

Controller

General information

The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings.

Operation

- Turn.

• Press.

• Move in two directions.

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

Press once: call up main menu.

Press twice: open recently used menus.

Open the previous display.

Open the Options menu.

Button Function

Open the Audio menu.

Opens the Phone menu.

Operating with the Controller

Opening the main menu

Press the button.

The main menu is displayed.

All Central Information Display (CID) functions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu items

Highlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

1. Press the Controller.

Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, for instance "System settings", a new display appears.

- Move the Controller to the left.

Closes the current display and shows the previous display.

- Press button.

The previous display opens.

- Move the Controller to the right.

New display is opened.

An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened.

Opening recently used menus

The recently used menus can be displayed.

Press button twice.

Opening the Options menu

Press button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

The Options menu consists of various areas:

- Control options for the selected main menu, for instance for "Media/Radio".

- If applicable, further operating options for the selected menu, for instance "Save station".

Changing settings

Settings, such as brightness, can be entered.

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"

5. "Brightness at night"

6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is displayed.

7. Press the Controller.

Entering letters and numbers

Input

1. Turn the Controller: select letters or numbers.
2. OK confirm entry.

Deleting

Symbol Function

←Press the Controller: delete letters or number.
←orABC	Hold the Controller down: delete all letters or numbers.

Using alphabetical lists

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries, the letters for which there is an entry are displayed at the left edge.

1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.
   All letters for which there are entries are displayed on the left edge.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
   The first entry of the selected letter is displayed.

Programmable memory buttons

General information

The Central Information Display (CID) functions can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly, for

instance radio stations, phone numbers, and menu entries.

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

Storing a function

1. Select the function via the Central Information Display (CID).
2. Press and hold the desired button, until a signal sounds.

Running a function

1...6 Press button. The function will work immediately.

This means, for instance that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the key assignment

Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects.

The button assignment is displayed at the top edge of screen.

Deleting the button assignments

1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds.

2. "OK"

General settings

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Language

Setting the language

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Time

Setting the time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"

4. "Time:"

5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are displayed.

6. Press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes are displayed.
8. Press the Controller.

Setting the time format

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Date

Setting the date

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Make the settings for the month and year.

Setting the date format

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Setting the units of measurement

You can set the units of measurement for some values, for example, fuel consumption, distances and temperature.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Activating/deactivating the display of the current vehicle position

Concept

If vehicle location has been activated, the current vehicle position can be displayed in the MINI Connected app.

Activating/deactivating

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Vehicle tracking"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
5. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating popup windows

For some functions, popup windows are displayed automatically on the Control Display. Some of these popup windows can be activated or deactivated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Pop-ups"
4. Select the desired setting.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Control Display

Brightness

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Depending on the light conditions, the brightness settings may not be clearly visible.

Screensaver

If no entries are made via the Central Information Display (CID), a screensaver can be displayed after an adjustable time.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. Select the desired setting.

2. "My MINI"

3. "System settings"
4. "Displays"
5. "Control display"
6. "Screensaver"

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Messages

Concept

The menu centrally displays all messages arriving in the vehicle in list form.

General information

The following messages can be displayed:

• Traffic messages.
• Check Control messages.
• Service requirements messages.

Messages are additionally displayed in the status field.

Retrieving messages

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"

2. Select the desired message.

The respective menu is opened, where the message is displayed.

Deleting messages

All messages, except Check Control messages, can be deleted from the list. Check Control messages are displayed as long as they are relevant.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
3. Press button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all notifications"

Settings

The following settings can be adjusted:

• Select the applications, from which messages will be permitted.
• Sort the messages according to date or priority.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting.

Data protection

Data transfer

Concept

The vehicle offers various functions which require data to be transferred to MINI or a service provider. The data transfer can be deactivated for some functions.

General information

With data transfer deactivated, the respective function cannot be used.

Only make these settings while stationary.

Activating/deactivating the data transfer

Follow the instructions on the Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. Switch on the ignition.
2. "My MINI"
3. "System settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting.

Deleting personal data in the vehicle

Concept

Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores personal data, such as stored radio stations. This personal data can be permanently deleted via the Central Information Display (CID).

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following data is deleted:

• Driver profile settings.
• Stored radio stations.
• Stored programmable memory buttons.
• Travel and Onboard Computer information.
• Phone book.

Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 15 minutes.

Functional requirement

Data can only be deleted while stationary.

Deleting data

Heed and follow the instructions on the Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. "My MINI"

3. "System settings"

4. "Data privacy"

5. "Delete personal data"

6. "Delete personal data"

7. "OK"

8. Exit and lock the vehicle.

After 15 minutes, the deletion process is completed.

If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the deletion.

Canceling deletion

Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data.

Connections

Concept

Various connection types are available for using mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection type to select depends on the mobile device and the desired function.

General information

The following overview shows possible functions and the suitable connection types for them. The scope of functions depends on the mobile device.

Function Connec- tion type
Making calls via the hands-free system.	Bluetooth.
Using phone functions via the Central Information Dis-play (CID).
Playing music from the smartphone or the audio player.	Bluetooth or USB.
USB storage device:	USB.
Playing music.

The following connection types require one-time pairing with the vehicle:

- Bluetooth.

Paired devices are automatically recognized later on and connected to the vehicle.

Safety information

WARNING

Operating the integrated information systems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Compatible devices

General information

Information on mobile devices compatible with the vehicle can be found at www.mini-usa.com/bluetooth.

Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed or deviating software versions.

Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number

When looking for compatible devices, you may have to state the vehicle identification number and the software part number. These numbers can be displayed in the vehicle.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"

Bluetooth connection

Functional requirements

• Compatible device, refer to page 51, with Bluetooth interface.
• The remote control is in the vehicle.
• The device is ready for operation.
• Bluetooth is activated on the device and in the vehicle, refer to page 51.
• Bluetooth pre-settings, such as visibility, may be required on the device; refer to the owner's manual of the device.

Switching on Bluetooth

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth®"

Pairing the mobile device with the vehicle

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Connect new device"

5. Select the functions for which the device will be used:

6. "Telephone"

7. "Bluetooth® audio"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is displayed on the Control Display.

1. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity of the mobile device.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile device display.

Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.

1. Depending on the mobile device, a control number is displayed or the control number must be entered.

- Compare the control number displayed on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the device.

Confirm the control number on the device and on the Control Display.

- Enter and confirm the same control number on the device and via the Central Information Display (CID).

The device is connected and displayed in the device list.

If connection was not successful: Frequently Asked Questions, refer to page 52.

Frequently asked questions

All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as expected.

In this case, the following explanations can help:

Why could the mobile phone not be paired or connected?

- There are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone or vehicle.

In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections with other devices.

Delete all known Bluetooth connections from the device list on the mobile phone and start a new device search.

- The mobile phone is in power-save mode or has only a limited remaining battery life.

Charge mobile phone.

Why does the mobile phone no longer react?

- The applications on the mobile phone do not function anymore.

Switch the mobile phone off and on again.

- Possibly too high or too low ambient temperatures for mobile phone operation.

Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme ambient temperatures.

Why can phone functions not be used via the Central Information Display (CID)?

- The mobile phone may not be properly configured, for instance as Bluetooth audio device.

Connect the mobile phone with the telephone function.

Why are no or not all phone book entries displayed or why are they incomplete?

- Transmission of the phone book entries is not yet complete.

- It is possible that only the phone book entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted.

- It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.

- It may not be possible to transmit contacts from social networks.

- The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high.

– Data volume of the contact too large, for instance due to stored information such as notes.

Reduce the data volume of the contact.

- A mobile phone is only connected as an audio source.

Reconfigure the mobile phone and connect it with the telephone function.

How can the phone connection quality be improved?

- The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on the mobile phone.

If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, contact the hotline, a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

USB connection

General information

Mobile devices with a USB port are connected to the USB interface.

- Mobile phones.

- Audio devices with USB port, for instance MP3 player.

- USB storage devices.

Common file systems are supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended formats.

The following applications are possible:

Follow the following when connecting:

- Do not use force when plugging the connector into the USB interface.

- Use a flexible adapter cable.

- Protect the USB storage device against mechanical damage.

- Due to the large number of USB media available on the market, it cannot be guaranteed that every device is operable on the vehicle.

- Do not expose USB media to extreme environmental conditions, such as very high temperatures; refer to the owner's manual of the device.

- Due to the many different compression techniques, proper playback of the media stored on the USB storage device cannot be guaranteed in all cases.

- A connected USB storage device will be supplied with charging current via the USB interface if the device supports this.

- To ensure proper transmission of the stored data, do not charge a USB storage device via the onboard socket, when it is connected to the USB interface.

- Depending on how the USB storage device is being used, settings may be required on the USB storage device, refer to the owner's manual of the device.

Not compatible USB media:

- USB hard drives.

- USB hubs.

- USB memory card readers with multiple inserts.

- HFS-formatted or NTFS-formatted USB storage devices.

- Devices such as fans or lamps.

Functional requirement

Compatible device, refer to page 51, with USB interface.

Connecting the device

Connect the USB storage device using a suitable adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to page 204.

The USB storage device is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list.

Managing mobile devices

General information

• After one-time pairing, the devices are automatically recognized and reconnected when the ignition is switched on.
• The data stored on the SIM card or in the mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle after recognition.
• For some devices, certain settings may be necessary, for instance authorization, see owner's manual of the device.

Displaying the device list

All devices paired and/or connected with the vehicle are displayed in the device list. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

A symbol indicates, for which function a device is used.

Symbol Function

	"Telephone"
	"Bluetooth® audio"

Configuring the device

Functions can be activated or deactivated for paired and connected devices.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select the desired device.

5. Select the desired setting.

If a function is assigned to a device, the function will be deactivated where appropriate for a device that is already connected and the device will be disconnected.

Disconnecting the device

The connection of the device to the vehicle is disconnected.

The device remains paired and can be connected again, refer to page 54.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Disconnect device"

Connecting the device

A disconnected device can be reconnected. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Mobile devices"

4. Select device.

5. "Connect device"

The functions that were assigned to the device before disconnecting are assigned to the device when it is reconnected. If the device is already connected, these functions are deactivated.

Deleting the device

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Delete device"

The device is disconnected and removed from the device list.

Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

You can use the following media formats to call up the content in the Owner's Manual:

- Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 56.

Printed Owner's Manual

Concept

The printed Owner's Manual describes all standard, country-specific, and optional features offered with the series.

General information

The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication can be obtained as printed book from the service center.

Supplementary Owner's Manuals

Also follow the instructions of the Supplementary Owner's Manuals, which are included in addition to the onboard literature.

CONTROLS

Opening and closing 60

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel 83

Transporting children safely 93

Driving 97

Displays 120

Lights 137

Safety 143

Driving stability control systems 164

Driving comfort 169

Climate control 189

Interior equipment 198

Storage compartments 205

Cargo area 208

Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Remote control

General information

The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls with integrated key.

Each remote control contains a replaceable battery. Replacing the battery, refer to page 63.

You may set the button functions, depending on the vehicle equipment and country version. Settings, refer to page 70.

The vehicle stores personal settings for every remote control. Driver profile, refer to page 69.

The remote controls hold information about required maintenance. Service data in the remote control, refer to page 292.

To prevent possible locking in of the remote control, take the remote control with you when exiting the vehicle.

Safety information

WARNING

People or animals in the vehicle can lock the doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the remote control with you so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside.

WARNING

Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehicle while being exposed to extreme temperatures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

WARNING

Unattended children or animals can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions:

• Pressing the Start/Stop button.
• Releasing the parking brake.
• Opening and closing the doors or windows.
• Engaging selector lever position N.
• Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the remote control with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Overview

1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
4 Panic mode

Unlocking

Press the button on the remote control.

Depending on the settings, refer to page 70, the following access points are unlocked.

- Driver's door and fuel filler flap.

Press the button on the remote control again to unlock the other vehicle access points.

- All doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler flap.

In addition, the following functions are executed:

• Unlocking is confirmed by the turn signals and the horn. This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 70.
• The settings stored in the driver profile, refer to page 69, are applied.

• The interior lights, refer to page 141, and the MINI logo projection are switched on, provided that the interior lights were not switched off manually.

• Depending on the settings, the welcome light and headlight courtesy delay feature, refer to page 138, are switched on.

• Exterior mirrors folded through convenient closing are folded open.
• The alarm system, refer to page 71, is switched off.

The light functions may depend on the ambient brightness.

Convenient opening

Safety information

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the convertible top. There is a risk of injury. When opening and closing the convertible top, observe the movement and keep the area of movement clear.

Opening

Press and hold this button on the remote control after unlocking.

The windows and the sliding sun roof integrated into the convertible top are opened, as long as the button on the remote control is pressed.

With Comfort Access:

If close to the vehicle, the convertible top can also be opened.

Press the remote control button again after the sliding sun roof integrated into the convertible top

is fully opened. Press and hold the button until the convertible top is fully opened and locked.

Leaving the vicinity of the vehicle stops the motion.

Locking

1. Close the driver's door.

2. Press button on the remote control.

The following functions are executed:

• All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are locked.
• Locking is confirmed by the turn signals and the horn. This function must be activated in the settings, refer to page 70.
• The alarm system, refer to page 71, is switched on.

If the engine or ignition is still switched on when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks twice. In this case, the engine or ignition must be switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.

With Comfort Access: convenient closing

Safety information

WARNING

With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the convertible top. There is a risk of injury. When opening and closing the convertible top, observe the movement and keep the area of movement clear.

Closing

Press and hold the button on the remote control in the area close to the vehicle, until the closing operation is completed.

The windows and convertible top close.

Releasing the button stops the closing procedure. Leaving the vicinity of the vehicle stops the motion of the convertible top.

Press button in the vicinity of the vehicle again until the convertible top operation is completed.

Switch on interior lights and courtesy light

Press button on the remote control with the vehicle locked.

The MINI logo projection is also switched on.

These functions are not available if the interior lights were switched off manually.

The light functions may depend on the ambient brightness.

After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing the button again.

Tailgate

General information

To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, it is possible to specify whether the tailgate can be unlocked with the remote control and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. Adjust the settings, refer to page 70.

Safety information

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when operating the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear during opening and closing.

Opening

Press button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung downward.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

- Press button on the remote control and hold for at least 3 seconds.

- Briefly press the button on the remote control three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Replacing the battery

1. Remove the integrated key from the remote control, refer to page 65.

2. Slide the integrated key into the opening and raise the cover.

The battery compartment is accessible.

1. Slide the integrated key in the cover of the battery compartment and raise the cover.

1. Push battery in the direction of the arrow using a pointed object and lift it out.

1. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the positive side facing up.

2. Insert lid and cover.

3. Push the integrated key into the remote control until it engages.

Have old batteries disposed of by a dealer's service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop or take them to a collection point.

Additional remote controls

Additional remote controls are available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Loss of the remote controls

A lost remote control can be blocked and replaced by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Malfunction

General information

A Check Control message is displayed.

Remote control detection by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances:

• The battery of the remote control is discharged. Replacing the battery, refer to page 63.
• Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.
• Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects.

Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects.

- Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the remote control.

Do not transport the remote control together with electronic devices.

- Interference of radio transmission by a charging process of mobile devices, for instance charging of a mobile phone.

In the case of interference, the vehicle can be unlocked and locked from the outside with the integrated key, refer to page 65.

Starting the engine via emergency detection of the remote control

It is not possible to start the engine if the remote control has not been detected.

It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready state if the remote control has not been detected.

Proceed as follows in this case:

1. Hold the remote control as shown against the marked area on the steering column. Pay attention to the display in the instrument cluster.
2. If the remote control is detected:

Start the engine within 10 seconds.

If the remote control is not detected, slightly change the position of the remote control and repeat the procedure.

Frequently asked questions

What precautions can be taken to be able to open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in remote control?

- The options provided by the Remote Services of the MINI Connected app include the ability to lock and unlock a vehicle.

This requires an active MINI Connected contract and the MINI Connected app must be installed on a smartphone.

- Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via the MINI Connected Call Center. An active MINI Connected contract is required.

Integrated key

General information

The driver's door can be locked and unlocked without remote control using the integrated key.

The integrated key can also be used for the glove compartment on the front passenger side.

Safety information

WARNING

Unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge.

Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehicle while being exposed to extreme temperatures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it.

NOTICE

The door lock is permanently joined with the door. The door handle can be moved. When pulling the door handle with the integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Remove the integrated key before pulling the outside door handle.

Removing

Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the integrated key, arrow 2.

Locking/unlocking via the door lock

1. Remove lid on the door lock.

To do this, slide the integrated key into the opening from below and remove the lid.

1. Unlock or lock the door lock using the integrated key.

The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside.

Alarm system

The alarm system is not switched on if the vehicle is locked with the integrated key.

The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the door lock. In order to stop this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition, if needed,

through emergency detection of the remote control, refer to page 64.

Buttons for the central locking system

General information

In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on.

Overview

Buttons for the central locking system.

Locking

Press the button with the doors closed.

• The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
• The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking.

Unlocking

Press button.

Opening

- Press button to unlock the doors together, and then pull the door handle above the armrest.

- Pull the door opener on the door to be opened. The other door remain locked.

Comfort Access

Concept

The vehicle can be accessed without activating the remote control.

All you need to do is to have the remote control with you, such as in your pants pocket.

The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior.

General information

Comfort Access supports the following functions:

• Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
• Convenient closing.
• Opening trunk lid.

Functional requirements

• To lock the vehicle, the remote control must be located outside of the vehicle near the doors.
• The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

Unlocking

On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle, press the button.

Depending on the settings, refer to page 70, only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap may be unlocked. Unlike when unlocking with the remote control, pressing the button on the outer door handle again does not unlock the other vehicle access points. Rather, the vehicle is locked again.

If a door of a locked vehicle was opened from the inside via the door opener, pressing the button on the outer door handle first locks the vehicle again. To unlock, the button on the outer door handle must be pressed again.

This is the case whether the vehicle was locked automatically after driving off or via the central locking system button from the inside.

Locking

On the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle, press the button.

Convenient closing

Safety information

WARNING

With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing.

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the convertible top. There is a risk of injury. When opening and closing the convertible top, observe the movement and keep the area of movement clear.

Closing

Press and hold down the button on the driver's or front passenger's outer door handle.

In addition to locking, the convertible top and the windows are closed.

Press and hold the button, until the convertible top is fully closed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in.

Open tailgate

General information

If you open the tailgate via Comfort Access, locked doors will not be unlocked.

To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area.

Safety information

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when operating the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear during opening and closing.

Opening

Press button on the exterior of the tailgate.

Malfunction

Remote control detection by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances:

- The battery of the remote control is discharged. Replacing the battery, refer to page 63.

- Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.

- Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects.

Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects.

- Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the remote control.

Do not transport the remote control together with electronic devices.

Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking request recognition function on the door handles.

In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the remote control or using the integrated key, refer to page 65.

Tailgate

General information

To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the remote control in the cargo area. Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, it is possible to specify whether the tailgate can be unlocked with the remote control and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. Adjust the settings, refer to page 70.

Safety information

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when operating the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear during opening and closing.

Opening from the outside

- Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle. With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or have the remote control with you. Press button on the tailgate.

- Press button on the remote control for approx. 1 second. Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked. Unlocking with the remote control, refer to page 62.

The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung downward.

Opening from the inside

With the vehicle stationary, press the button in the driver's floor area.

Closing

To close the tailgate, swivel it upwards and press it closed.

Trunk emergency unlocking

Pull the handle inside the cargo area. The tailgate unlocks.

Driver profile

Concept

In the driver profiles, individual settings for several drivers can be stored and called up again when required.

General information

There are three driver profiles with which personal vehicle settings can be stored. Every remote control has one of these driver profiles assigned.

If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote control, the assigned personal driver profile will be activated. All settings stored in the driver profile are automatically applied.

If several drivers use their own remote control, the vehicle will adjust the personal settings during unlocking. These settings are also restored, if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a person with a different remote control.

Changes to the settings are automatically stored in the driver profile currently activated.

Functional requirements

For the system to be able to identify the driver profile associated to a particular driver, the detected remote control must be clearly allocated to the driver.

This is the case when:

• The driver is only carrying his or her own remote control.
• The driver unlocks the vehicle.
• The driver gets into the vehicle through the driver's door.

Settings

The settings for the following systems and functions are stored in the active profile. The scope of storable settings depends on country and equipment.

• Unlocking and locking.
• Lights.
• Radio.
• Instrument cluster.
• Programmable memory buttons.
• Volumes, tone.
• Control Display.
• Climate control.
• PDC Park Distance Control.
• Rearview camera.
• MINI Driving Modes.
• Intelligent Safety.

System limits

A clear assignment between the remote control and driver may not be possible in the following cases, for example.

• The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his or her own remote control, but another person is driving.
• The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort Access and has multiple remote controls with him or her.
• The driver changes, but the vehicle is not locked and unlocked.
• Multiple remote controls are located outside of the vehicle.

Settings

General information

Depending on the package and country version, various settings are available for the remote control functions.

These settings are stored for the driver profile, refer to page 69, currently used.

Unlocking

Doors

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
5. Select desired setting:

- "Driver's door only"

Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks the entire vehicle.

- "All doors"

The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Tailgate

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
   4.

The text next to the symbol indicates the current setting.

1. Select desired setting:

- "Tailgate"

Only the tailgate is unlocked.

- "Tailgate and door(s)"

The tailgate and the doors are unlocked.

- "Tailgate opens after unlocking"

The vehicle must be unlocked before the tailgate can be used with the remote control.

- "Button lock"

It is not possible to use the tailgate via the remote control.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, this setting may not be offered.

Automatic locking

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select desired setting:

- "Lock automatically"

The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if no door is opened after unlocking.

- "Lock after starting to drive"

The vehicle locks automatically after you drive off.

Automatic unlocking

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Unlock at end of trip"

After the engine is switched off by pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is automatically unlocked.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirmation signals.

- "Flash for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, locking by one.

- With alarm system:

"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the horn.

Alarm system

General information

When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system reacts to the following changes:

• Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood or the trunk lid.

• Movements in the car's interior.

• Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during attempts at stealing a wheel or when towing the vehicle.

• Disconnected battery voltage.
• Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.
• Locking the vehicle while a device is connected to the socket for the OBD Onboard-Diagnosis. Socket for the OBD Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 293.

The alarm system signals these changes visually and acoustically:

- Acoustic alarm:

Depending on local regulations, the acoustic alarm may be suppressed.

- Visual alarm:

By flashing the exterior lighting.

Overview

Indicator light on the interior mirror.

Switching on/off

When you unlock and lock the vehicle, either with the remote control or with Comfort Access, the alarm system is switched off and on at the same time.

Opening the doors with the alarm system switched on

The alarm system is triggered when a door is opened if the door was unlocked using the integrated key in the door lock.

Switching off the alarm, refer to page 73.

Opening the tailgate with the alarm system switched on

The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm system is switched on.

After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and monitored again provided the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

- Press button on the remote control and hold for at least 3 seconds.

- Briefly press the button on the remote control three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Signals of the indicator light

- The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 seconds:

The alarm system is switched on.

- Indicator light flashes for approx.

10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds:

Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are not correctly closed. Correctly closed access points are secured.

When the still open access points are closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be switched on.

- The indicator light goes out after un- locking:

The vehicle has not been tampered with.

- The indicator light flashes after unlocking until the engine ignition is switched

on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes:

An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensor

The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.

The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is towed.

Interior motion sensor

The car's interior is monitored to the height of the seats. The alarm system is switched on together with the interior motion sensor even when the convertible top is open. Falling objects such as leaves can trigger the alarm unintentionally.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

General information

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized action occurred.

Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:

• In automatic vehicle washes.
• In duplex garages.
• During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at sea or on a trailer.
• With animals in the vehicle.
• When the vehicle is locked after start of fueling.

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor can be switched off in such situations.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked.

The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 seconds and then continues to flash.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.

Switching off the alarm

• Unlock the vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition, if needed through emergency detection of remote control, refer to page 64.
• With Comfort Access: If you have the remote control with you, unlock the vehicle using the button on the driver's side or passenger side door.

Power windows

General information

If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the windows are automatically closed except a gap.

Safety information

WARNING

When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

Overview

Power windows.

Power windows for all windows.

Opening

- Pass the switch to the resistance point.

The window opens while the switch is being held.

- Press the switch beyond the resistance point.

The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

- Press the switch to the resistance point.

All side windows open simultaneously while the switch is being held.

- Press the switch beyond the resistance point.

All side windows automatically open simultaneously. Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Convenient opening via the remote control, refer to page 61.

Closing

- Put the switch to the resistance point. The window closes while the switch is being held.

- P: the switch beyond the resistance point.

The window closes automatically if the door is closed. Pulling the switch again stops the motion.

- Pull the switch.

All side windows close simultaneously while the switch is being held.

Convenient closing via the remote control, refer to page 62.

Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 67.

Jam protection system

General information

If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as a window closes, closing is interrupted. The window opens slightly.

Safety information

WARNING

Accessories on the windows such as antennas can impact jam protection. There is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the area of movement of the windows.

Closing without the jam protection system

In case of danger from the outside or if ice might prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:

1. the switch past the resistance point and hold it there.

The window closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted.

1. the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.

The window closes without jam protection.

Malfunction

General information

In certain situations a window can only be operated to a limited extent.

- After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the a window can only be operated to a limited extent. The system must be initialized in this case.

- The power window motors are equipped with overheating protection. If a window is opened and closed several times within a short period of time, the overheating protection switches the motor off temporarily. Depending on the degree of overheating, it may only be possible to close the window or it may not be possible to operate it at all.

In this case: allow the power window motor to cool down.

Initializing the system

The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running.

During initialization, the affected window closes without jam protection.

WARNING

When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing.

1. Open the affected window completely.

2. the switch to the resistance point and hold.

The window closes.

1. Continue holding the switch pulled to the resistance point.

The window opens and closes once or twice after approx. 15 seconds, depending on the vehicle's equipment.

1. Release switch.

Convertible top with integrated sliding sun roof

Overview

Convertible top, sliding sun roof switch

Sliding sun roof

General information

Before closing the sliding sun roof, remove any foreign objects from the windshield frame; otherwise, closing may be prevented.

Opening

Press the switch backward, until the desired position is reached or the sliding sun roof is fully open.

Closing

Press the switch forward, until the desired position is reached or the sliding sun roof is closed.

Convertible top

General information

The convertible top can be opened or closed at speeds up to approx. 18 mph/30 km/h.

If the vehicle is accelerated above a speed of approx. 18 mph/30 km/h while the convertible top is being moved, the convertible top movement stops.

Follow the following information:

• While the convertible top is moving, it is not possible to open the tailgate.
• If possible, close the convertible top when the vehicle is parked. A closed convertible top protects it from weather-related damage and to some extent from theft.
• Even when the convertible top is closed, only store valuables in the locked cargo area or in the locked glove compartment.
• At higher speeds, vacuum produced in the car's interior causes the convertible top to begin to flutter. Increase the air flow via the ventilation so that no vacuum is produced in the vehicle.
• It is not possible to start the engine and operate the convertible top simultaneously. When the engine is started using the Start/Stop button or using the Auto Start/Stop function, the convertible top movement is briefly interrupted.
• Opening a door interrupts closure of the convertible top.
• When loading the cargo area, make sure that the cargo does not push against the cargo area partition, refer to page 78, from below.
• In order to protect the battery, move the convertible top only when the engine is running if possible.
• Before closing the convertible top, remove any foreign objects from the windshield frame; otherwise, closing may be prevented.

Safety information

NOTICE

Incorrect operation can damage the convertible top and other parts of the vehicle.

There is a risk of damage to property. During operation, heed the following points:

- Keep the area of movement of the convertible top clear because the convertible top swivels out upward. Maximum area of movement: 78.8 inches/2 meters.

- Fully close the trunk lid.

- Do not leave the convertible top open for more than a day while it is wet.

- Do not open the convertible top, if it is wet, covered in snow, iced up, or dirty.

- Do not place objects on the convertible top.

- The rollover protection system may not be triggered.

- Do not operate convertible top on uneven sections of road.

- Always open or close the convertible top completely. The convertible top is only locked in the final positions.

- Make sure that no objects are on the cargo cover when opening the convertible top.

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the convertible top. There is a risk of injury. When opening and closing the convertible top, observe the movement and keep the area of movement clear.

WARNING

When operating the convertible top while driving, the view to the rear may be limited. At speeds above 20 mph/30 km/h the convertible top remains in its current position. There is a danger of accidents and property damage. When operating the convertible top while driving, observe traffic attentively and, if necessary, reduce speed. Do not operate while backing up or with wind.

WARNING

The convertible top is not suitable for the mounting of roof carrier systems. The roof carrier could come loose. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any roof carrier systems to the convertible top.

WARNING

A convertible top that is not completely open or closed is not locked and can open by itself while driving due to the wind. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the convertible top is always completely open or closed.

Functional requirements

The following requirements must be fulfilled in order to be able to move the convertible top.

• The ignition or radio-ready state must be switched on.
• The cargo area partition, refer to page 78, is stored and latched in the bottom position.

• The tailgate is closed.

• The external temperature is above 14°F / - 10°C .

• The voltage of the vehicle electrical system is sufficient.
• The convertible top drive is not overheating.
• Vehicle speed is below 18 mph/30 km/h.
• The windows can be lowered.

If this requirement is not met, a check control message is displayed.

Operating from the inside

Opening

Press the switch backward and hold until the sliding sun-roof is open.

Press the switch backward again and hold. The windows

roll down and the convertible top opens while the switch is being pulled. After the convertible top is completely open, the switch can be held or pressed again briefly in order to raise the windows.

Closing

Push the switch forward and hold. The windows are lowered, the convertible top is closed and the windows are raised again while the switch is being held.

Preventing an interruption

Press and hold the switch, until the convertible top is fully open or closed. A Check Control message is displayed when the opening procedure has finished.

The convertible top movement is interrupted if the switch is released. The se-

quence can be continued in the desired direction using the switch.

Operate switch again until the convertible operation is terminated.

Operating from the outside

When equipped with Comfort Access the convertible top can also be operated from outside.

• Convenient opening, refer to page 61, via the remote control.
• Convenient closing, refer to page 62, via the remote control.
• Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 66.

Cargo area partition

With the convertible top closed, the cargo area volume can be expanded.

Expanding the cargo area volume, refer to page 211.

Manually closing the convertible top

General information

If the convertible top has an electrical malfunction, it can be closed manually. Two persons are necessary to do this.

If possible, have a convertible top manually closed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

WARNING

In case of an electrical malfunction, the convertible top cannot be locked in the fully open position. The convertible top will rise up while the vehicle is moving. There is a risk of an accident. Do not open the closed convertible top manually.

Before closing

1. Lower the windows completely.
2. Switching off the ignition.
3. Take the hexagon wrench and screw-driver out of the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 294.

Unlocking the convertible top

1. Loosen and remove the screw on both sides of the vehicle using the hexagon wrench.

1. On the left side of the vehicle only: raise the cover and pull the sensor outward and off.

1. Raise the cover on both sides of the vehicle, then slide it under the trim, first

toward the inside, arrow 1, and then toward the front, arrow 2.

1. Turn the cover under the trim as far outward as possible.

1. Loosen and remove the two screws on both sides of the vehicle using the hexagon wrench.

1. Only on the left side of the vehicle: slightly lift the side frame, arrow 1, and pull the sensor with the cable forward out from the guide, arrow 2.

Swivel the cable out sideways so it cannot be pinched.

Closing the convertible top

1. Grasp the convertible top with two people, with both hands on the two side frames.

2. Lift out the convertible top simultaneously on both sides and swivel forward onto the windshield panel.

To take out the convertible top, pull forcefully on the side frame. Begin with an upward movement and then change to a forward movement.

1. In the vehicle, lift the cover in the center of the roof using the screwdriver.

Apply the screwdriver to the recesses, arrows.

1. For this purpose, insert the hexagon wrench into the designated receptacle in the center of the roof and press push upward, arrow 1.

Turn the hexagon wrench counterclockwise to open the side frame lock.

1. Pull of the locking elements from the pins on the left and right side of the side frames, arrow.

1. Insert the pins on the side frames into the receptacles on the windshield frame.

1. Turn the hexagon wrench clockwise to close the side frame lock.

2. Continue turning the hexagon wrench clockwise to close the sliding sun roof.

Wind deflector

Concept

The wind deflector reduces the air movement in the car's interior when driving with the convertible top down.

Safety information

NOTICE

When moving the front seats back, the wind deflector can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement is clear prior to moving the front seats back.

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when operating the wind deflector. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement around the wind deflector is clear when installing and removing it and folding it up.

WARNING

Objects placed on the installed wind deflector can be thrown into the car's interior or endanger other traffic participants, for instance in case of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. The objects can damage the wind deflector. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not place any objects on the installed wind deflector.

Installation

The wind deflector is located in a protective jacket in the cargo area.

To protect the head restraints from damage, slide the rear head restraints into the upper position prior to installation and removal.

1. Take the wind deflector out of the protective jacket.

Fully unfold the wind deflector so that the handle, arrow 1, folds down and locks the wind deflector.

1. Open the rear side window, if necessary. Insert wind deflector from one side of the vehicle with the pins in the corre-

sponding fixing points on the opposite side of the vehicle.

1. To release the lock, fold the handle up and hold it.

1. Press the wind deflector inwardly and up, arrow 1, to the extent that the wind deflector can be positioned in front of the fixing points on the installation side. Release the handle.

Press the wind deflector downward, while inserting the pins in the corresponding fixing points, arrows 2.

1. Press the wind deflector downward in the middle, until the handle engages, arrows 1.

Grasp the inner framework of the wind deflector and fold it up, arrow 2.

Removing

Proceed in reverse sequence.

Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Sitting safely

An ideal seating position that meets the needs of the occupants can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the event of an accident, the correct seating position plays an important role. Follow the information in the following chapters:

• Seats, refer to page 83.
• Safety belts, refer to page 85.
• Head restraints, refer to page 87.
• Airbags, refer to page 143.

Front seats

Safety information

WARNING

Seat adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of an accident. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

WARNING

With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding under the safety belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the most upright position as possible and do not adjust again while driving.

WARNING

There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Adjusting seats

Overview

1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt

Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction.

After releasing the lever, move the seat forward or back slightly making sure it engages properly.

Height

Pull the lever up or press it down as often as needed to reach the desired height.

Backrest tilt

Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Lumbar support

The curvature of the seat backrest can be adjusted in a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Turn the wheel in order to increase or decrease the curvature.

Thigh support

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support.

Entering the rear

Safety information

WARNING

There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

WARNING

Unexpected movements of the rear seat backrest while driving may occur due to an unlocked rear seat backrest. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of injury. Fold back and lock the rear seat backrests before driving.

Fold the rear seat backrest down

1. Pull lever up to the stop.

1. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
2. Push the seat forward.

Original position

The driver's seat features a mechanical memory function for forward/back and backrest adjustment.

1. Push the seat back into the original position.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.

If the backrest is folded back when the seat is not yet in the original position, the seat engages in the current position. In this case, manually adjust longitudinal direction, refer to page 84.

Front seat heating

Overview

Seat heating

Switching on

Press button once for each temperature level.

The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit.

If the trip is continued within approx.

15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is activated automatically with the temperature selected last.

When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to page 222, the heater output is reduced.

Switching off

Press and hold the button, until the LEDs go out.

Safety belts

Number of safety belts and safety belt buckles

The vehicle is fitted with four safety belts to ensure occupant safety. However, they can only offer protection when adjusted correctly.

General information

Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving off. Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts.

The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted.

Safety information

WARNING

Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one person will potentially defeat the ability of the safety belt to serve its protective function. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an occupant's lap, but must be transported and secured in designated child restraint systems.

WARNING

The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are wearing safety belts correctly.

WARNING

The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the following situations:

- The safety belts or safety belt buckles are damaged, soiled, or changed in any other way.

– Belt tensioners or belt retractors were modified.

Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have the safety belts checked after an accident at the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct use of safety belts

• Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to your body over your lap and shoulders.
• Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over your lap. The safety belt may not press on your stomach.
• Do not rub the safety belt against sharp edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or fragile objects.
• Avoid thick clothing.
• Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward around your upper body.

Buckling the safety belt

1. Slowly guide the safety belt out of the holder when fastening it.

2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage audibly.

Unbuckling the safety belt

1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up mechanism.

Belt loop

When fastening the safety belts on the rear seats, make sure that the belt loop is closed.

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat

Display in the instrument cluster

The indicator light lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly.

The safety belt reminder can also be acti-

vated if objects are placed on the front pas- senger seat.

Front head restraints

Safety information

WARNING

A missing protective effect due to removed or not correctly adjusted head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

• Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats.
• Adjust the head restraint so its center supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.

- Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

WARNING

Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

• Do not use seat or head restraint covers.

• Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.

• Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.

• Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height: John Cooper Works sport seat

The height of the head restraints cannot be adjusted.

Adjusting the height

• To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.
• To raise: push the head restraint up.

After setting the height, move the head restraint up or down slightly, making sure it engages properly.

Removing: John Cooper Works sport seat

The head restraints cannot be removed.

Removing

Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest forward.
2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

Installing

Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.

Rear head restraints

Safety information

WARNING

A missing protective effect due to removed or not correctly adjusted head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

• Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats.
• Adjust the head restraint so its center supports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible.
• Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

WARNING

Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

• Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
• Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.
• Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.
• Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height

• To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.
• To raise: push the head restraint up.

After setting the height, move the head restraint up or down slightly, making sure it engages properly.

Removing

Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to page 210, in question.
2. Pull head restraint up against the resistance.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

Installing

Proceed in the reverse order to install the head restraint.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

General information

The mirror on the front passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror.

Safety information

WARNING

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. The distance to the traffic behind could be incorrectly estimated, for instance while changing lanes. There is a risk of an accident. Estimate the distance

to the traffic behind by looking over your shoulder.

Overview

1 Settings
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out

Selecting a mirror

To change over to the other mirror: Slide the switch.

Adjusting electrically

Press button.

The mirror movement follows the button movement.

Malfunction

In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.

Folding in and out

NOTICE

Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle can be damaged in vehicle washes.

There is a risk of damage to property. Before washing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.

Press button.

Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.

Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the following situations:

- In vehicle washes.

- On narrow roads.

Mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Automatic heating

Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on.

Automatic dimming feature

The exterior mirror on the driver's side is automatically dimmed. Photocells in the car's interior mirror, refer to page 91, are used to control this.

Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror

Concept

If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted downward. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.

Activating

1. Slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating

Slide the switch to the passenger's side mirror position.

Interior mirror, manually dimmable

Flip lever

To reduce the blinding effect of the interior mirror, flip the lever forward.

Turn knob

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror.

Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature

Overview

Photocells are used for control:

• In the mirror glass.
• On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirements

• Keep the photocells clean.
• Do not cover the area between the interior mirror and the windshield.

Steering wheel

Safety information

WARNING

Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary only.

Settings

1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating position.
3. Fold the lever back up.

Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle,

e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

The right place for children

Safety information

WARNING

Unattended children or animals can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions:

• Pressing the Start/Stop button.
• Releasing the parking brake.
• Opening and closing the doors or windows.
• Engaging selector lever position N.
• Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the remote control with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Always transport children in the rear seat

General information

Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the rear seat.

Transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat in suitable child restraint systems designed for the age, weight and size of the child. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight, and size.

Safety information

WARNING

The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suitable additional child restraint systems. The efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.

Children on the front passenger seat

General information

Before using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and side airbags on the front passen-

ger side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of front-seat passenger airbags, refer to page 145.

Safety information

WARNING

Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.

WARNING

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

Installing child restraint systems

General information

Pay attention to the specifications of the child restraint system manufacturer when selecting, installing, and using child restraint systems.

In order to facilitate the installation of a back-facing child restraint system in the rear:

Move the front passenger seat as far up as possible before folding down the backrest.

Safety information

WARNING

The protective effect of damaged child restraint systems or of child restraint systems exposed to an accident and their fastening systems can be limited or lost. A child can e.g., not sufficiently restrained, for instance in the event of an accident or braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have damaged child restraint systems or of child restraint systems exposed to an accident and their fastening systems checked and possibly replaced by the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

WARNING

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

On the rear seats

In order to facilitate the installation of a back-facing child restraint system:

Move the front passenger seat as far up as possible before folding down the backrest.

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags

WARNING

Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger airbags are deactivated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.

After installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated.

Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags automatically, refer to page 145.

Seat position and height

Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest and thus best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident.

If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is located in front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the front passenger seat carefully forward until the best possible belt guide position is reached.

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten child restraint systems.

Locking the safety belt

1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it tight against the child restraint system. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt

1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in completely.

LATCH child restraint fixing system

General information

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.

Pay attention to the operating and safety information of the child restraint system manufacturer when installing and using LATCH child restraint fixing systems.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors

The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Safety information

WARNING

If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are not correctly engaged, the protective effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are securely engaged and that the LATCH child restraint fixing system fits securely against the backrest.

Position

Symbol Meaning

The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.

Seats equipped with lower anchors are marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH symbols.

Before installing LATCH child restraint fixing systems

Pull the safety belt away from the area of the child restraint system.

Assembly of LATCH child restraint fixing systems

1. Install child restraint system, see manufacturer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are properly connected.

Upper LATCH retaining strap

For Canadian customers Only.

The following statement is required by Transport Canada:

This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready tether anchorages. As such neither a

child restraint system, nor a booster cushion, requiring the use of a tether strap can be properly secured in the vehicle.

Driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Start/Stop button

Concept

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine.

Steptronic transmission: the engine starts in selector lever

position P or N with the brake pedal pressed when you press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: the engine starts with the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop button is pressed.

Ignition on

Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop button without stepping on the clutch pedal.

Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop button, and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time.

All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster light up for a varied length of time.

To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Ignition off

Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the clutch pedal.

Steptronic transmission: shift to selector lever position P, press the Start/Stop button again without stepping on the brake.

All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go out.

To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Safety measures

The ignition is switched off automatically in the following situations while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is off:

• When locking the vehicle, and when the low beams are switched on.
• Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started. This function is only available when the low beams are switched off.
• When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the low beams are switched off.
• While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled with driver's door open and low beams off.
• When the front doors are opened if there is no other person sitting in the front seats.

- The low beams switch to parking lights after some minutes of no use.

Steptronic transmission with a tap-operated selector lever, refer to page 112: when switching off the ignition, the selector lever position P is engaged automatically if the selector lever position R, D or M/S is engaged.

Radio-ready state

General information

In the radio-ready state, certain power consumers remain ready for operation.

Activating

With the engine running, press the Start/Stop button.

If the engine is not running and the ignition is switched on: the system automatically activates radio-ready state when the door is opened if the lights are switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on.

The radio-ready state remains active if, for instance the ignition is automatically switched off for the following reasons:

• Opening or closing the driver's door.
• Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
• When automatically switching from low beams to parking lights.

Switching off automatically

The radio-ready state is switched off automatically in the following situations:

• If the driver's or front passenger door is opened when exiting the vehicle, with the engine switched off manually.
• If the ignition is switched off manually with the Start/Stop button.
• After approx. 8 minutes.
• When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system.

- Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started.

Starting the engine

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are colorless and odorless. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.

WARNING

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

NOTICE

In the case of repeated starting attempts or repeated starting in quick succession, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned. The catalytic converter can over-

heat. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid repeated starting in quick succession.

Gasoline engine

Depending on the motorization, the full drive power may not be available for approximately 30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case, the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.

Steptronic transmission

Starting the engine

1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.

Manual transmission

Starting the engine

1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neutral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.

Engine stop

Safety information

WARNING

Unattended children or animals can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions:

• Pressing the Start/Stop button.
• Releasing the parking brake.
• Opening and closing the doors or windows.

- Engaging selector lever position N.

- Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the remote control with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

WARNING

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.

- On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Steptronic transmission

Switching off the engine

1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the parking brake.
2. Engage selector lever position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
   The engine is switched off.
   The radio-ready state is switched on.

Manual transmission

Switching off the engine

1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the Start/Stop button.
   The engine is switched off.
   The radio-ready state is switched on.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Set the parking brake.

Auto Start/Stop function

Concept

The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The engine starts automatically for driving off.

After every start of the engine using the Start/Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in the last selected state, refer to page 101. When the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it is available when the vehicle is traveling faster than about 3 mph/5 km/h.

Depending on the selected driving mode, refer to page 166, the system is automatically activated or deactivated.

Engine stop

Functional requirements

The engine is switched off automatically during a stop under the following conditions:

Manual transmission:

• Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is not pressed.
• The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed.

Steptronic transmission:

• The selector lever is in selector lever position D.
• The brake pedal remains depressed while the vehicle is stopped.
• The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed.

In order to be able to release the brake pedal, engage the selector lever in position P. The engine remains off.

To continue driving depress the brake pedal. When a gear is engaged, the engine starts automatically.

The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced when the engine is switched off.

Displays in the instrument cluster

The display indicates that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready for an Automatic engine start.

The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic engine stop have not been met.

Functional limitations

The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations:

• External temperature too low.
• The external temperature is high and automatic climate control is running.
• The car's interior has not yet been heated or cooled to the required level.
• The engine is not yet at operating temperature.
• The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being turned.
• After driving in reverse.
• Fogging of the windows when the automatic climate control is switched on.
• The vehicle battery charge is very low.
• At higher elevations.
• The hood is unlocked.
• The parking assistant is activated.
• Stop-and-go traffic.
• Selector lever in selector lever position R, N or M/S.

Starting the engine

The engine starts automatically under the following conditions:

- Manual transmission: clutch pedal is pressed.

- Steptronic transmission: by releasing the brake pedal.

After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Safety mode

After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met:

- The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open.

- The hood was unlocked.

Some indicator lights light up for a varied length of time.

The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop button.

Functional limitations

Even if driving off was not intended, the de-activated engine starts up automatically in the following situations:

- Excessive warming of the car's interior when the air conditioning is switched on.

- The steering wheel is turned.

- Steptronic transmission: change from selector lever position D to R, N or M/S.

- Steptronic transmission: change from selector lever position P to R, N, D or M/S.

- The vehicle begins rolling.

- Fogging of the windows when the automatic climate control is switched on.

- The vehicle battery charge is very low.

- Excessive cooling of the car's interior when the heating is switched on.

- Manual transmission: low brake vacuum pressure; this can occur, for instance if the brake pedal is depressed a number of times in succession.

Switching the system on/off

Using the button

Press button.

- LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.

The engine is started during an automatic engine stop.

The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button.

- LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is activated.

Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop

During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, for instance when leaving it.

Steptronic transmission:

1. Engage selector lever position P.

2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.

3. Set the parking brake.

Manual transmission:

1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Set the parking brake.

Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Automatic deactivation

In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated automatically for safety reasons, for instance if no driver is detected.

Malfunction

The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches off the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Parking brake

Safety information

WARNING

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Applying

The lever automatically engages after being pulled up.

The indicator light lights up red. The parking brake is set.

Lower light: indicator light in Canadian models

If for once use during driving is required, engage the parking brake slightly and hold the button down.

To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake action, lightly apply the parking brake periodically while coasting, if traffic conditions permit.

The brake lights will not light up if the parking brake is set.

Releasing

Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide the lever down.

Turn signal, high beams, head-light flasher

Turn signal

Using turn signals

Press the lever past the resistance point.

Canada: the lever returns into its starting position after actuation. To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance point.

Triple turn signal activation

Lightly tap the lever up or down.

The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Signaling briefly

Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

Malfunction

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

High beams, headlight flasher

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.

- High beams on, arrow 1. The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on.

- High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Washer/wiper system

General information

Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

WARNING

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Switching on

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached.

• Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
• Intermittent operation or rain sensor, position 1.
• Normal wiper speed, position 2.
• Fast wiper speed, position 3.

When travel is interrupted with the wiper system switched on: when travel continues, the wipers resume at their previous speed.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the lever down.

- Switching off: press the lever down until it reaches its standard position.

- Brief wipe: press the lever down from the standard position.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept

The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall.

General information

The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.

Activating

Press the lever up once from its standard position, arrow 1.

Wiping is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper operation is deactivated.

Deactivating

Press the lever back into the standard position.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set interval.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sensor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

WARNING

The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on the windshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles

The washer jets are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on.

Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept

The fold-out position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.

General information

Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

WARNING

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Folding away the wipers

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press and hold the wiper level down, until the wipers stop in a close to vertical position.

1. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield.

Folding down the wipers

After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the windshield.

2. Switch on the ignition.

3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Canada: wiper system

General information

Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

Safety information

WARNING

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Switching on

Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance point.

• Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
• Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once beyond the resistance point.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Switching off and brief wipe

Press the lever down.

• To switch off from fast wiper speed: press down twice.
• To switch off from normal wiper speed: press down once.
• Brief wipe: press down once.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Interval mode or rain sensor

Concept

The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall.

General information

The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.

Activating/deactivating

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Wiping is started.

If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: the LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper operation is deactivated.

During trip interruption with the rain sensor switched on: if the trip is resumed

within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automatically activated again.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set interval.

With activated rain sensor: set the rain sensor sensitivity.

Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Windshield washer system

Safety information

WARNING

The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on the windshield and activates the wipers briefly.

Windshield washer nozzles

The washer jets are automatically heated whenever the ignition is switched on.

Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept

The fold-out position enables the wipers to be folded away from the windshield.

General information

Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for instance.

Safety information

WARNING

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Folding away the wipers

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds, until the wipers remain in a nearly vertical position

1. Fold the wipers all the way away from the windshield.

Folding down the wipers

After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Fold the wipers back down onto the windshield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

Washer fluid

General information

All washer nozzles are supplied from one reservoir.

Use a mixture of tap water and windshield washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be used.

Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Safety information

WARNING

Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful substances and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.

United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container.

Use of BMW's Windshield Washer Concentrate or the equivalent is recommended.

WARNING

Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Only add washer fluid when the engine is cooled down. Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE

Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on the windows can lead to damage to the washing system. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add silicon-containing additives to the washer fluid.

NOTICE

Mixing different windshield washer concentrates or antifreeze can damage the washing system. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not mix different windshield washer concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the information and mixing ratios provided on the containers.

Overview

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment.

Malfunction

The use of undiluted windshield washer concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to incorrect readings at temperatures below +5 °F/-15 °C.

Manual transmission

Safety information

WARNING

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

- Set the parking brake.

- On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.

- On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

NOTICE

When shifting to a lower gear, excessive speeds can damage the engine. There is a risk of damage to property. When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right.

Schematic diagram

-1-6: forward gears

- R: reverse

Shifting

General information

Depending on the engine installation, the engine speed during a shifting operation is adjusted automatically as required for harmonious and dynamic gear shifting.

Reverse gear

Select only when the vehicle is stationary. To overcome the resistance push the gear-shift lever dynamically to the left and en-

gage reverse gear with a forward shifting movement.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power, for instance in a vehicle wash, or be pushed.

1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out of a forward gear or reverse.
3. Release the parking brake.

Steptronic transmission

Concept

The Steptronic transmission combines the functions of an automatic transmission with the possibility of manual shifting, if needed.

Safety information

WARNING

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against rolling.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

• Set the parking brake.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
• On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Selector lever version

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, a transmission with either a latching selector lever or a tap-operated selector lever is installed.

Transmission with a latching selector lever

The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D are selected by moving the selector lever into the respective selector lever position. The selector lever engages in the selector lever positions.

Transmission with a tap-operated selector lever

The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D are selected by tapping the selector lever forward or back. The selector lever automatically returns to the center position when released.

Selector lever position P is engaged automatically, refer to page 113, in certain situations.

Selector lever positions

Drive mode D

Selector lever position for normal vehicle operation. All gears for forward travel are activated automatically.

Reverse R

Engage selector lever position R only when the vehicle is stationary.

Neutral N

The vehicle may be pushed or roll without engine power in selector lever position N, for instance in vehicle washes, refer to page 115.

Parking position P

General information

Selector lever position, for instance for parking the vehicle.

The transmission blocks the drive wheels in selector lever position P.

Engage selector lever position P only when the vehicle is stationary.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to move.

Automatic parking position for a transmission with a tap-operated selector lever

Selector lever position P is engaged automatically in situations such as the following:

- After the engine is switched off when the vehicle is in the radio-ready state, refer to page 98, or when the ignition is

switched off, refer to page 97, while selector lever position R, D or M/S is engaged.

• If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and selector lever position D, M/S or R is engaged.
• After the ignition has been switched off while selector lever position N is engaged.

Engaging selector lever positions: with a latching selector lever

General information

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Functional requirements

The selector lever can only be taken out of selector lever position P if the ignition is on or the engine is running.

Engaging selector lever position D, N, R, or P

With the vehicle stationary, depress the brake pedal before shifting out of selector lever position P or N; otherwise, the shift block will not be deactivated and the shift command will not be executed.

A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty operation:

- Unintentional shifting into selector lever position P or R.

- Unintentional shifting from selector lever position P into another selector lever position.

1. To release the selector lever lock: with the brake pedal depressed, press the button on the front of the selector lever.

1. Move the selector lever into the desired position.

Engaging selector lever positions: with a tap-operated selector lever

General information

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

Functional requirements

Only when the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to change from selector lever position P to another selector lever position.

Depending on the transmission version, the engine may have to be running too.

The selection lever position P cannot be changed until all technical requirements are met.

Engaging selector lever position D, N, R

A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty operation:

- Unintentional shifting into selector lever position R.

- Unintentional shifting from selector lever position P into another selector lever position.

1. Press and hold the button to release the selector lever lock.

1. With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly push the selector lever in the desired direction, past a resistance point, if needed. The selector lever automatically returns to the center position when released.

Engaging selector lever position P

Press button P.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

General information

In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power for a short distance, for instance in a vehicle wash, or be pushed.

Engaging selector lever position N: with a latching selector lever

1. Switch on the ignition.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage selector lever position N.
5. Release brake.

The vehicle may roll.

If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position. Manually unlock the transmission lock, if needed, refer to page 117.

Engaging selector lever position N: with a tap-operated selector lever

1. Start the engine while pressing on the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage selector lever position N.

5. Switch the engine off.

In this way, the ignition remains switched on, and a Check-Control message is displayed.

The vehicle may roll.

NOTICE

Selector lever position P is automatically engaged when the ignition is switched off. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not switch ignition off in vehicle washes.

Irrespective of the ignition, the selector lever position P is automatically engaged after approx. 15 minutes.

If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position.

Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if needed, refer to page 118.

Kickdown

Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.

Sport program M/S

Concept

The shifting points and shifting times in the Sport program are designed for a sportier driving style. The transmission, for instance shifts up later and the shifting times are shorter.

Activating the sport program

Press the selector lever to the left out of selector lever position D.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, for instance S1.

The sport program of the transmission is activated.

Ending the Sport program

Push the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Manual mode M/S

Concept

Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.

Activating manual mode

1. Press the selector lever to the left out of selector lever position D, arrow 1.

1. Push the selector lever forward or pull it backward, arrows 2.

Manual mode M/S becomes active and the gear is changed.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, for instance M1.

Shifting

- To shift down: press the selector lever forward.

- To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.

The Steptronic transmission continues shifting automatically in certain situations, for instance when certain engine speed limits are reached.

With a tap-operated selector lever: when M2 is set manually while the vehicle is stationary, the transmission will no longer shift back to M1. This shifting behavior is retained until you engage M1 manually or exit M.

Avoiding automatic upshifting

Once a particular engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed.

MINI John Cooper Works: once particular engine speeds are attained, upshifting is not automatically performed in M/S manual mode.

For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmission, automatic shift operations are not performed if one of the following conditions is met:

- DSC is deactivated.

- TRACTION is activated.

In addition, there is no downshifting for kickdown.

With the appropriate transmission version, the lowest possible gear can be selected by simultaneously activating kickdown and operating the left shift paddles. This is not possible by switching briefly via the shift

paddles from selector lever position D to manual mode M/S.

Ending the manual mode

Push the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport transmission

Concept

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel.

General information

Shifting

Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, for instance down-shifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high.

Short-term manual mode

In selector lever position D, actuating a shift paddle switches into manual mode temporarily.

After conservative driving in manual mode without acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode.

It is possible to switch into automatic mode as follows:

- Pull and hold right shift paddle.

- In addition to the briefly pulled right shift paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.

Continuous manual mode

In selector lever position S, actuating a shift paddle switches into manual mode permanently.

Shifting

• To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
• To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
• The lowest possible gear can be selected by pulling and holding the left shift paddle.

The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Displays in the instrument cluster

The selector lever position is displayed, for example P.

Releasing the transmission lock manually: with a latching selector lever

If the selector lever is locked in selector lever position P despite the ignition being switched on, the brake pedal being depressed and the button on the selector lever being pressed, the transmission lock can be unlocked manually:

Before unlocking the transmission lock manually, engage the parking brake force-

fully to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.

1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve, together with the lower retaining ring, from the center console. To do so, pull the retaining ring upward at the rear edge.

1. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connector, if needed.
2. Using the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 294, press the yellow release lever downward, see arrow.

1. Press the button on the front of the selector lever and move the selector lever back slightly.

Release the release lever.

1. Bring the selector lever into the desired position.

For additional information, see the chapter on tow-starting and towing.

Releasing the transmission lock electronically: with a tap-operated selector lever

General information

Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from a danger area.

Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.

Engaging selector lever position N

Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the engine.

1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must audibly start.
3. Press the button on the selector lever, arrow 1, and press and hold the selector lever into selector lever position N, arrow N, until selector lever position N is displayed in the instrument cluster.

A Check Control message is displayed.

1. Release the selector lever.
2. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops.
3. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area and secure it against moving on its own.

For additional information, see the chapter on tow-starting and towing.

Steptronic Sport transmission: Launch Control

Concept

Launch Control enables optimum acceleration on surfaces with good traction under dry surrounding conditions.

General information

The use of Launch Control causes premature component wear since this function represents a very heavy load for the vehicle.

Do not use Launch Control during the break-in, refer to page 216, period.

To start with Launch Control do not steer the steering wheel.

Functional requirements

Launch Control is available as soon as the engine and transmission are at operating temperature.

Depending on the external temperature and driving style, the engine and transmission require an interrupted trip of up to 30 miles/50 km in order to reach the operating temperature needed for Launch Control.

Start with launch control

While the engine is running:

1. OFF button and select SPORT with the MINI Driving Modes switch. The instrument cluster displays TRACTION in combination with SPORT. The DSC OFF indicator light lights up.

2. Engage selector lever position S.

3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on the brake.
4. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position, kickdown.

A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument cluster.

1. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within 3 seconds, release the brake.

Repeated use during a trip

After Launch Control has been used, the transmission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes before Launch Control can be used again.

After using Launch Control

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dynamic Stability Control again.

System limits

An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.

Displays

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle,

e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Instrument cluster

Overview

1 Tachometer 125
2 Indicator/warning lights
3 Speedometer

4 Fuel gauge 125
5 Display/reset miles 125
6 Electronic displays 121

Electronic displays

1 Driver assistance systems

Messages, for instance Check Control

Time 126

External temperature 126

Selection lists 130

Total miles/trip odometer 125

Onboard Computer 130

2 Selector lever position 112

Gear shift indicator 128

3 MINI Driving Modes switch status 166

Check Control

Concept

The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems.

General information

A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lights and SMS text messages in the instrument cluster.

In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a SMS text message may appear on the Control Display.

Indicator/warning lights

General information

The indicator/warning lights can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Red lights

Safety belt reminder

Indicator light flashes or is illuminated: safety belt on the driver or passenger side is not buckled. The safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.

Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly.

Airbag system

Airbag system and belt tensioner are not working.

Have the vehicle checked immediately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Parking brake

The parking brake is set.

Release the parking brake, refer to page 103.

BRAKE

Approach control warning

Indicator light illuminates: advance warning is issued, for example when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

Increase distance.

Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another vehicle at a relatively high differential speed.

Intervention by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Person warning

If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal sounds.

Orange lights

Active Cruise Control

The number bars shows the selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead.

Camera-based cruise control, refer to page 169.

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control

Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

Indicator light flashes: the conditions are not adequate for the system to work.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Yellow lights

Anti-lock Braking System ABS

Braking force boost may not be working. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the longer braking distance into account.

Have the system immediately checked by a dealer's service center ther qualified service center or repair

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

The indicator light flashes: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce

speed and modify your driving style to the driving circumstances.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunctioned.

Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

DSC, refer to page 164.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.

DSC, refer to page 164, and DTC, refer to page 165.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire.

Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 152.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

The indicator light lights up: the Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low tire inflation pressure or a flat tire. Fol-

low the information in the Check Control message.

The indicator light flashes and then continuously lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be detected.

- Interference caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.

- TPM was unable to complete the reset. Reset the system again.

- A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is mounted: have it checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.

- Malfunction: have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 148.

Steering system

Steering system in some cases not working.

Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Emissions

- The warning light lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

- The warning light flashes under certain circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter.

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 293.

Green lights

Turn signal

Turn signal switched on.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indinal bulb has failed.

Turn signal, refer to page 103.

Parking lights, headlight

Parking lights or headlights are switched on.

Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, refer to page 137.

Front fog lights

Front fog lights are switched on. Front fog lights, refer to page 140.

High-beam Assistant

High-beam Assistant is switched on. High beams are switched on and off automatically depending on the traf- nation.

High-beam Assistant, refer to page 139.

Cruise control

The system is switched on. It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering wheel.

Blue lights

High beams

High beams are switched on. High beams, refer to page 103.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press and hold button on signal lever.

Continuous display

Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If several malfunctions occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively.

The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed again automatically.

Temporary display

Some Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check Control messages are stored and can be displayed again later.

Displaying stored Check Control messages

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.

Display

Check Control

At least one Check Control message is displayed or is stored.

SMS text messages

SMS text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator/warning lights.

Supplementary SMS text messages

Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can be called up via Check Control.

With urgent messages the added text will be automatically displayed on the Control Display.

Further help

Depending on the Check Control message, further help can be selected.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the desired text message.
5. Select the desired setting.

- "Owner's Manual"

Display additional information about the Check Control message in the Integrated Owner's Manual.

- "Service request"

Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

- "MINI Roadside Assistance"

Contact Roadside Assistance.

Messages after trip completion

Special messages displayed while driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off.

Fuel gauge

The arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.

Vehicle tilt position may cause

the display to vary.

Information on refueling, refer to page 258.

The yellow indicator light illuminates, once the fuel reserve is reached.

Tachometer

Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect the engine.

Odometer and trip odometer

Concept

The total number of kilometers driven and the number of kilometers driven since the last reset are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Reset the trip odometer

Press the button.

- The odometer is displayed when the ignition is switched off.

- When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset.

External temperature

General information

If the indicator drops to +37 °F/+3 °C, a signal sounds.

A Check Control message is displayed.

There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

Safety information

WARNING

Even at temperatures above +37 °F/+3 °C there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on bridges or shady sections of road. There is a risk of an accident. Modify your driving style to the weather conditions at low temperatures.

Display

The external temperature is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Time

The time is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The time can be set via the Central Information Display (CID).

Date

The date is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The date can be set via the Central Information Display (CID).

Range

General information

With a low remaining range:

• A Check Control message is displayed briefly.
• The remaining range is shown on the Onboard Computer.
• With a dynamic driving style, for instance taking curves aggressively, the engine function is not always ensured.

The Check Control message appears continuously below a range of approx.

30 miles/50 km.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a driving range of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel promptly.

Display

The current range is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Displaying the cruising range

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Range"

Current consumption

Concept

Displays the current fuel consumption. Check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmentally-friendly manner.

Displaying the current fuel consumption

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Current consumption"

Service requirements

Concept

The function displays the service requirements and the corresponding maintenance scopes.

General information

After the ignition is switched on the instrument cluster briefly displays available driving distance or time to the next scheduled maintenance.

A service advisor can read out the current service requirements from your remote control.

Display

Detailed information on service requirements

More information on the type of service required may be displayed on the Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"

Required maintenance procedures and legally mandated inspections are displayed.

1. Select an entry to call up detailed information.

Symbols

Symbols Description

No service is currently required.

The deadline for scheduled maintenance or a legally mandated inspection is approaching.

The service deadline has already passed.

Entering appointment dates

Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle inspections.

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Select the desired setting.

Automatic Service Request

Data regarding the service status or legally mandated vehicle inspections is automatically transmitted to your dealer's service center before your vehicle is due for service.

You can check when your dealer's service center was notified.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Teleservice Call"

Gear shift indicator

Concept

The system recommends the most fuel efficient gear for the current driving situation.

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, the gear shift indicator is active in the manual mode of the Steptronic transmission and with manual transmission.

Suggestions to shift gear up or down are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Manual transmission: displaying

Example Description

Fuel efficient gear is set.

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

Steptronic transmission: displaying

Example Description

Fuel efficient gear is set.

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

Speed Limit Info

Speed Limit Info

Concept

Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum permitted speed in the instrument cluster.

General information

The camera at the base of the interior mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet road conditions, etc., are also detected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as from the rain sensor, and will be displayed depending on the situation.

Without a navigation system, the system is subject to limitations imposed by technology. Traffic signs with speed limitations are detected and displayed only. Speed limita-

tions due to entering or exiting towns, highway signs, etc. are not displayed. Speed limits with extra text characters are always displayed.

Speed limits when towing a trailer are not shown.

Safety information

WARNING

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Display

Speed Limit Info is displayed via the On-board Computer.

Press button on the turn signal lever several times, if needed.

Speed Limit Info is displayed on the Info Display in the instrument cluster.

Speed Limit Info

The last speed limit detected. Without a navigation system the traffic signals are grayed out after curves or longer stretches of roadway.

Without navigation system: no speed limit or cancellation is detected.

System limits

The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the following situations:

• In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
• When signs are fully or partially concealed by objects, stickers or paint.
• When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.
• When driving toward bright lights or strong reflections.

• When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a sticker, etc.

• In the event of incorrect detection by the camera.

• When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker.
• If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
• When signs that are valid for a parallel road are detected.
  – During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.

Selection lists

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the buttons on the steering wheel and the display in the instrument cluster can be used to display or use the following:

• Current audio source.
• Redial phone feature.
• Turn on voice activation system.

Activating a list and adjusting the setting

Button on the steering wheel	Function
	Move selection up.
	Move selection down.

Display

Onboard Computer

Concept

The Onboard Computer displays different vehicle data in the instrument cluster, such as average values.

Calling up information on the Info Display

Press and hold button on signal lever.

Information is displayed in the Info Display of the instrument cluster.

Information at a glance

Info Display

Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information in the Info Display: If equipped with an Onboard

Computer:

- Range.

- GREEN Info.

When GREEN Mode is activated.

- Average consumption, fuel.

- Current consumption, fuel.

- Average speed.

- Date.

- Engine temperature display.

- Always Open Timer.

- Speed Limit Info.

- Speed.

If not equipped with an Onboard Computer:

- Engine temperature display.

The unit of some information can be changed.

Setting units, refer to page 48.

Selecting information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select what information from the On-board Computer can be displayed on the Info Display of the instrument cluster.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument panel"

5. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the profile currently used.

Information in detail

Range

Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel.

The range is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km.

GREEN info

The achieved range extension may be displayed as a bonus range.

Average fuel consumption

This is calculated for the period while the engine is running.

The average fuel consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the Onboard Computer.

Average speed

Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped are not included in the calculation of the average speed.

Resetting average values

Press and hold button on turn signal lever.

Engine temperature display

Concept

Displays the current engine temperature, based on a combination of coolant and engine oil temperature. As soon as the optimum operating temperature has been attained, the indicator is in the center position.

General information

If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the engine, become too hot, a Check Control message is displayed too.

When the engine temperature is too high, a red indicator light is displayed.

When the engine oil temperature is too high, a red indicator light is displayed.

Check the coolant level, refer to page 290.

Display

Always Open Timer

The Always Open Timer displays the current driving time and total driving time with the convertible top open in minutes and hours.

Reset the Always Open Timer

Reset the current driving time: press button on the turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds with the driving times displayed.

Speed Limit Info

Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum permitted speed in the instrument cluster.

Onboard Computer on the Control Display

Concept

The Onboard Computer displays different vehicle data on the Control Display, such as average values.

General information

Two types of Onboard Computers are available on the Control Display:

- "Onboard info": average values, such as the fuel consumption, are displayed. The values can be reset individually.

- "Trip computer": the values deliver an overview of a certain distance and can be reset as often as necessary.

Calling up the Onboard Computer or trip computer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Driving information"

3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the Onboard Computer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"

Resetting the trip computer

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip computer"
4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.

- "Reset": all values are reset.

- "Automatic reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has come to a standstill.

1. If necessary, "OK"

Driving Excitement

Concept

On the Control Display, sport instruments can be displayed, and the vehicle state can be checked before the use of the SPORT program.

Sport instruments

General information

On the Control Display, values for power and torque are displayed.

Displaying sport instruments

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Sport displays"

4. "Sports instruments"
   Via MINI Driving Modes switch:

5. Activate SPORT.

6. "Sport displays"
7. "Sports instruments"

Speed warning

Concept

A speed limit can be set that when reached will cause a warning to be issued.

General information

The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit again, after it has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the speed warning

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Warning at:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.

Activating/deactivating the speed warning

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Speed warning"

Setting your current speed as the speed warning

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"

LED ring on the central instrument cluster

Concept

The LED ring displays light animations to represent specific functions.

Basic displays

Basic functions, for instance the tachometer, can be set to be displayed continually if so desired.

Event displays

Functions that are only displayed temporarily, for instance the volume or temperature settings, can be set as event displays.

Several vehicle assistance functions can also be displayed on the LED ring. This display corresponds with the displays of the function in the respective display.

Example: tachometer

Like the tachometer in the instrument cluster, the light animations of the tachometer's basic display show the current RPMs and the respective RPM warning thresholds.

Display

• Arrow 1: current RPM.
• Arrow 2: prewarning field.
• Arrow 3: warning field.

Switching on/off LED ring

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Center Instrument"

Adjusting the LED ring

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Basic display" or "Event display"
6. Select the desired setting.

Setting the brightness

The brightness can be adjusted when night lighting is active in the instrument cluster. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

John Cooper Works: sport displays in the Head-up Display

General information

The sport displays in the Head-up Display assist with a sporty driving style.

Switching on

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Displayed information"
6. "Sport displays"

Display

1 Speed
2 Shift point indicator
3 Gear display
4 Current engine speed
5 Warning field, speed

Shift point indicator

Concept

Shift point indicator in the Head-up Display indicates the optimum shifting point. Thus, with a sporty driving style, the best possible vehicle acceleration is achieved.

Functional requirements

• Steptronic Sport transmission:
  Manual mode M/S and, if necessary, Dynamic Traction Control DTC are activated.
• Press the accelerator pedal all the way down.

Display

Successive gray illuminated fields indicate the upcoming shift moment.

Shift up immediately when the red fields light up.

When the maximum possible speed is reached, the entire display flashes. The fuel supply is reduced to protect the engine.

Always Open Timer

Concept

The Always Open Timer displays the driving times with open convertible top on the Control Display and in the Onboard Computer.

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Always Open Timer can also be displayed as a light animation on the LED ring of the central instrument cluster.

Displaying the Always Open Timer

1. "My MINI"
2. "Openometer"

Display

The following information is displayed on the Control Display:

• Current driving time with the convertible top open in minutes and hours.
• Total driving time with the convertible top open in minutes and hours.
• Current external temperature while driving with the convertible top open.

Maximum 99 hours and 59 minutes are displayed for the current driving time, and maximum 999 hours and 59 minutes for the total driving time.

Reset the current driving time

1. "My MINI"
2. "Openometer"
3. "Reset trip"

To reset the total driving time, contact your service center.

Vehicle status

General information

The status can be displayed and actions performed for several systems.

Opening the vehicle status

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"

Information at a glance

• "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 152.
• "Tire Pressure Monitor": Status of the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 148.
• "Engine oil level": Electronic engine oil level check, refer to page 286.
• "Check Control": Check Control messages are stored in the background and can be displayed on the Control Display. Displaying stored Check Control messages, refer to page 124.
• "Service required": Displaying service requirements, refer to page 127.
• "Teleservice Call": service request.

Lights

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Overview

Switches in the vehicle

The light switch element is located next to the steering wheel.

Symbol Function

0‡

Rear fog light.

#0

Front fog lights.

≡C

Automatic headlight control.

Cornering light.

Symbol Function

0

Lights off.

Daytime running lights.

∃D ∅

Parking lights.

≡D

Low beams.

Instrument lighting.

Parking lights, low beams and roadside parking lights

General information

Position of switch:

If the driver's door is opened when the ignition is switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off.

Parking lights

Position of switch:

The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.

Do not use the parking lights for extended periods; otherwise, the battery may become discharged and it would then be impossible to start the engine.

When parking, switch on the one-sided roadside parking light, refer to page 138.

Low beams

Position of switch:

The low beams light up when the ignition is switched on.

Canada: roadside parking light

Concept

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on

With radio-ready state switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Switching off

Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

Welcome lights and headlight courtesy delay feature

Welcome lights

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment and the ambient brightness, individual light functions may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked.

Activating/deactivating

Position of switch:

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "Welcome lights"

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Headlight courtesy delay feature

General information

The low beams stay lit for a short while if the headlight flasher is switched on after the vehicle's radio-ready state is switched off.

Setting the duration

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. "Pathway lighting"

6. Set length of time.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Automatic headlight control

Concept

The low beams are switched on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness, for instance in tunnels, in twilight or if there is precipitation.

General information

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on.

Activating

Position of switch:

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on.

System limits

The automatic headlight control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judgment of lighting conditions.

For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. In these situations, switch the light on manually.

Daytime running lights

General information

Position of switch: 0, 3DDE 30

The daytime running lights light up when the ignition is switched on. After the ignition is switched off, the parking lights light up in position

Activating/deactivating

In some countries, daytime running lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to deactivate the daytime running lights.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"

5. Select the desired setting.

Settings are stored for the remote control currently used.

Cornering light

General information

Position of switch:

In tight curves, for instance on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, cornering light is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed.

The cornering light is automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals.

Adaptive headlight range con- trol

The adaptive headlight range control compensates for acceleration and braking operations in order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve optimum illumination of the roadway.

High-beam Assistant

Concept

The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic participants early on and automatically switches the high beams on or off depending on the traffic situation.

General information

The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the low speed range, the high beams are not switched on by the system.

The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.

The high beams can be switched on and off manually at any time.

Activating/deactivating

Position of switch, depending on the vehicle equipment: ☐ ☐ ☐

Press and hold button on signal lever.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low beams are switched on.

The headlights are automatically switched between low beams and high beams.

The blue indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams.

The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when manually switching the high beams on and off, refer to page 103.

To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever.

System limits

The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. In situation that require this, therefore switch off manually.

The system is not fully functional in the following situations, and driver intervention may be necessary:

• In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation.
• When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback

riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; or at animal crossings.

• In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on highways.
• In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the presence of highly reflective signs.
• When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with stickers, etc.

Fog lights

Front fog lights

Concept

The front fog lights work alongside the low beams to illuminate a wider area of the roadway.

Functional requirement

The low beams must be switched on before switching on the front fog lights.

Switching on/off

Press button.

The green indicator light lights up if the front fog lights are switched on.

If the automatic headlight control, refer to page 138, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lights.

When the high beams or headlight flasher are activated, the front fog lights are not switched on.

Instrument lighting

Functional requirement

The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness.

Settings

Adjust the brightness with the thumbwheel.

Interior lights

General information

Depending on the equipment, the interior lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and courtesy lights are controlled automatically.

Thumbwheel for the instrument lighting controls brightness of some of these features.

Overview

1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
3 Ambient light

Switching the interior lights on/off

Press button.

To switch off permanently: press the button and hold for approx. 3 seconds.

Switching the reading lights on and off manually

Press button.

The reading lights are located in the front next to the interior light.

Ambient light

General information

Depending on the equipment version, lighting can be adjusted for some lights in the car's interior.

Changing color

Push the switch forward or back: manual color change.

Press the switch forward or backward and hold for approx. 3 seconds, until the ambient light illuminates

several times: automatic color change. Push the switch again to end color changes.

Setting the brightness

Depending on the equipment, the brightness of the ambient light can be adjusted via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"

4. "Interior lighting"

5. "Brightness"

6. Adjust the brightness.

Safety

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle,

e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver

2 Front airbag, front passenger

3 Side airbag

4 Knee airbag

Front airbags

Front airbags help protect the driver and the front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone would not provide adequate protection.

Side airbag

In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest, lap, and head area.

Knee airbag

The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact.

Protective action

Airbags are not triggered in every impact situation, for instance in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.

Information on optimum effect of the airbags

WARNING

If the seat position is incorrect or the deployment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag system cannot provide protection as intended and may cause additional injuries due to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Follow the information on achieving the optimum protective effect of the airbag system.

• Keep a distance from the airbags.
• Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is triggered.
• Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the floor area and does not support them on the dashboard.
• Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag.
• There should be no additional persons, animals or objects between an airbag and a person.
• Dashboard and windshield on the front passenger side must stay clear - do not attach adhesive labels or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables, for in-

stance for GPS devices or mobile phones.

• Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag cover panels, do not cover them or modify them in any way.
• Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.
• Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags.
• Do not place seat cushions or other objects on the front seats that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags.
• Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.
• Never modify either the individual components or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, and the seats.
• Do not remove the airbag system.

Even when you follow all instructions very closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.

The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.

Vehicle modifications for a person with disabilities may affect the air bag system; contact MINI Customer Relations for further information.

Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbag system

Safety information

WARNING

Individual components can be hot after triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch individual components.

WARNING

Improperly executed work can lead to failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the airbag system might not trigger as intended despite the accident severity. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag system checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct function

When the ignition is switched on, the warning light in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates the operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning

• Warning light does not come on when the ignition is switched on.
• The warning light lights up continuously.

Automatic deactivation of the front-seat passenger airbags

Concept

The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's resistance.

Front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger's side are activated or deactivated.

General information

Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, refer to the safety information and instructions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children.

Safety information

WARNING

To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag function, the system must be able to detect whether a person is sitting in the front passenger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.

Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system

When transporting older children and adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up.

In this case, change the sitting position so that the front-seat passenger airbags are activated and the indicator light goes out.

If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear.

To enable correct recognition of the occupied seat cushion.

• Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically determined to be safe for use on the front passenger seat.
• Do not place any electronic devices on the front passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it.
• Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.
• No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags

The indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbags.

The light indicates whether the airbags are either activated or deactivated.

- The indicator light lights up when a child is properly seated in a child restraint system or when the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated.

- The indicator light does not light up when, for instance a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are activated.

Detected child restraint systems

The system generally detects children seated in a child restraint system, particularly in child restraint systems required by NHTSA at the point in time when the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child restraint system, make sure that the indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child restraint system has been detected and the front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and front-seat passenger airbag

The explosive power that activates driver's/front-seat passenger airbags very much depends on the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.

To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats as soon as a relevant Check Control message is displayed.

Calibrating the front seats

WARNING

There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

An appropriate Check Control message is displayed.

1. Move the respective seat all the way forward.
2. Move the respective seat forward again. The seat moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.

The calibration procedure is completed when the Check Control message disappears.

If the message continues to be displayed, repeat the calibration.

If the message does not disappear after a repeat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.

Rollover protection system

Concept

The rollover protection system is automatically activated in the event of a sufficiently serious accident or if the longitudinal axis is tilted excessively. The safety frames located behind the rear head restraints extend within fractions of a second.

Supplementing the reinforced windshield frame, the rollover protection system further increases passenger safety.

General information

Do not place any objects on the covers of the rollover protection system.

Safety information

WARNING

There can be damage or injuries when the rollover protection system is triggered. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the rollover protection system is clear.

WARNING

Improperly executed work can lead to failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering of the system. In the case of a malfunction, the system might not trigger as intended even if there is an accident severe enough to warrant it. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have the system checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

WARNING

After triggering or damage, system functionality is limited or not available anymore. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.

Have the system checked and replaced by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop in the event of triggering of or damage to the system.

WARNING

With an extended rollover protection system, the area of movement of the convertible top is limited. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When the rollover protection system is extended, do not move the convertible top.

Overview

Covers of the rollover protection system

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed when there is a malfunction.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

Concept

The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

General information

Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure and, depending on the model, the tire temperature.

With use of the system follow further information found under Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 262.

Functional requirements

The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

- After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset was performed with the correct tire inflation pressure.

- After the tire inflation pressure was adjusted to a new value, a reset was performed.

- Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.

Status display

Current status

The system status can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the system is active.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

The current status is displayed.

Additional information

The current tire inflation pressures are displayed too. It shows the actual values read; they may vary depending on driving style or weather conditions.

Resetting the system

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
5. Reset the tire inflation pressure using "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.

The following is displayed: "Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor...".

After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a short period, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values. The resetting process is completed automatically while driving.

After a successfully completed reset, the following is displayed: "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label for recommended pressures.".

You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue the reset resumes automatically.

Messages

General information

A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.

Safety information

WARNING

A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the information on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires.

If a tire inflation pressure check is required

Message

A symbol with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset was done.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

Inflation was not carried out according to specifications.

The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last reset.

Measure

1. Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
2. Reset the system.

If the tire inflation pressure is too low

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

There is a tire inflation pressure loss.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and drive moderately. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.

2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas station, check and correct the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, if necessary.

3. Reset the system.

If there is a significant loss of tire inflation pressure

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with the affected tire appears in a Check Control message on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 271, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage is not possible, please contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

1. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tires

Safety information

WARNING

Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for instance, your lane stability when braking is reduced, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of an accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.
   If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

Possible driving range with a depressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, external temperature. The driving range may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, the distance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following:

• Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
• Longer braking distances.
• Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

System limits

Temperature

The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's temperature.

Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire inflation pressure.

The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again.

These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply.

Sudden tire pressure loss

The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances.

Failure to perform a reset

The system does not function properly if a reset has not been carried out, for instance a flat tire is reported though tire inflation pressures are correct.

Malfunction

The yellow warning light flashes and is then illuminated continuously. A Check Control message is displayed.

It may not be possible to identify tire pressure losses.

Examples and recommendations in the following situations:

- A wheel without TPM wheel electronics, for instance an emergency wheel, is mounted: have it checked by a dealer's

service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.

• Malfunction: have system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
• The system was unable to complete the reset. Perform a system reset again.
• Interference caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

FTM Flat Tire Monitor

Concept

The system detects tire inflation pressure loss on the basis of rotation speed differences between the individual wheels while driving.

In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel changes. The difference will be detected and reported as a flat tire.

The system does not measure the actual inflation pressure in the tires.

Functional requirements

The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:

• After a tire or wheel replacement, an initialization was performed with the correct tire inflation pressure.
• After the tire inflation pressure was adjusted to a new value, an initialization was performed.

Status display

The current status of the flat tire monitor can be displayed, for instance whether the RPA is active.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
   The status is displayed.

Initialization required

An initialization must be performed in the following situations:

• After the tire inflation pressure has been adjusted.
• After a tire or wheel replacement.

Performing initialization

When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

4. Start the engine but do not drive off.

5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.

The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.

Messages

General information

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if needed.

Safety information

WARNING

A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the information on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires.

Indication of a flat tire

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, a symbol with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display.

Symbol Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with normal tires or run-flat tires.
   Run-flat tires, refer to page 271, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

If identification of flat tire damage is not possible, please contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

1. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.

Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.

Run-flat tires

Safety information

WARNING

Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for instance, your lane stability when braking is reduced, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of an accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Maximum speed

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Possible driving range with a depressurized tire

The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, external temperature. The driving range may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used.

If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions,

the distance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.

Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following:

– Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
- Longer braking distances.
- Changed self-steering properties.

Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes.

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire.

Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident.

Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

System limits

The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations:

• A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
• Sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recognized in advance.
• When the system has not been initialized.
• When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface.
• Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).

- When driving with snow chains.

Intelligent Safety

Concept

Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance system.

The intelligent safety systems can help prevent an imminent collision.

• Approach control warning with City light braking function, refer to page 156.
• Person warning with City light braking function, refer to page 159.

Safety information

WARNING

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

WARNING

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system might not output warnings or reactions or these might be output late, incorrectly, or without justification. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

WARNING

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Switching on/off

Some Intelligent Safety systems are automatically active after every departure. Some Intelligent Safety systems activate according to the last setting.

Press button briefly:

- The menu for the intelligent safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

- LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.

Adjust as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again: - All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. - The LED lights up green.

Hold down button: - All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. - The LED goes out.

Approach control warning with city light braking function

Concept

The system can help prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be prevented, the system will help reduce the collision speed.

The system sounds a warning before an imminent collision and activates brakes independently, if needed.

The automatic braking intervention is done with limited force and duration.

A camera at the base of the interior mirror controls the system.

The approach control warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated.

With the vehicle approaching another vehicle intentionally, the approach control warning and braking are delayed in order to avoid false system reactions.

General information

The system warns at two levels of an imminent danger of collision at speeds from approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with the current driving situation.

Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to 35 mph/60 km/h.

Detection range

Objects that the system can detect are taken into account.

Safety information

WARNING

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

WARNING

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system might not output warnings or reactions or these might be output late, incorrectly, or without justification. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

WARNING

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of an accident.

Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is automatically active after every driving off.

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

- The menu for the intelligent safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

- LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.

Adjust as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

- The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

- The LED goes out.

Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set via the Central Information Display (CID).

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Intelligent Safety"

4. "Warning time"

5. Select the desired setting.

The selected warning time is stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Warning with braking function

Display

If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster.

Symbol Measure

Symbol lights up red: prewarning.

Brake and increase distance.

Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning.

Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if necessary.

Prewarning

This warning is issued, for instance when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.

The driver must intervene actively when there is a prewarning.

Acute warning with braking function

Acute warning is displayed in case of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a high differential speed.

The driver must intervene actively when there is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is assisted by a minor automatic braking intervention in a possible risk of collision.

Acute warnings can also be triggered without previous forewarning.

Braking intervention

The warning prompts the driver to react. During a warning, the maximum braking force is used. Prerequisite for the brake booster is sufficiently quick and sufficiently hard stepping on the brake pedal. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.

Manual transmission: during a braking intervention up to a complete stop, the engine may be shut down.

The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle stability has not been restricted, for instance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.

The driver may cancel the braking intervention by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel.

Object detection can be restricted. Follow the limitations of the detection range and functional restrictions.

System limits

Safety information

WARNING

The system can react not at all, too late, incorrectly, or without justification due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Follow the information regarding the system limits and actively intervene if needed.

Detection range

The system's detection potential is limited.

Thus, a system reaction might not come or might come late.

E.g., the following situations may not be detected:

• Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed.
• Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
• Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
• Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

• In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
• In tight curves.
• If the field of view of the camera or the windshield are dirty or covered.
• If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
• Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button.
• During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.
• If there are constant blinding effects because of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky.

Warning sensitivity

The more sensitive the warning settings are, the more warnings are displayed. Therefore, there may also be an excess of premature or unjustified warnings and reactions.

Person warning with City light braking function

Concept

The system can help prevent accidents with pedestrians.

When driving at city speeds, the system will issue a warning if there is imminent risk of a collision with pedestrians, and support this with a light braking function.

The camera at the base of the interior mirror controls the system.

General information

With sufficient brightness, the system warns about possible collision danger with pedestrians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking before a collision. The system reacts to people who are within the detection range of the system.

Detection range

The detection area in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas:

• Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle.
• Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left of the central area.

A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located within the central area. A warning is issued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.

Safety information

WARNING

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

WARNING

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system might not output warnings or reactions or these might be output late, incorrectly, or without justification. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

WARNING

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is automatically active after every driving off.

Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:

- The menu for the intelligent safety system is displayed. The systems are individually switched off according to their respective settings.

- LED lights up orange or goes out respective to their individual settings.

Adjust as needed. The individual settings are stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Press button again:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

- The LED lights up green.

Hold down button:

- All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

- The LED goes out.

Warning with braking function

Display

If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster.

The red symbol is displayed and a signal sounds.

Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

Braking intervention

The warning prompts the driver to react. During a warning, the maximum braking force is used. Prerequisite for the brake booster is sufficiently quick and sufficiently hard stepping on the brake pedal. If there is a risk of collision, the system may assist with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.

Manual transmission: during a braking intervention up to a complete stop, the engine may be shut down.

The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle stability has not been restricted, for instance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.

The driver may cancel the braking intervention by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel.

Object detection can be restricted. Follow the limitations of the detection range and functional restrictions.

System limits

Safety information

WARNING

The system can react not at all, too late, incorrectly, or without justification due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Follow the information regarding the system limits and actively intervene if needed.

Detection range

The detection potential of the camera is limited.

Thus, a warning might not be issued or be issued late.

E.g., the following situations may not be detected:

• Partially covered pedestrians.
• Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour.
• Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
• Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations:

• In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
• In tight curves.
• If the field of view of the camera or the windshield are dirty or covered.

• If the driving stability control systems are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.

• Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button.

• During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.
• If there are constant blinding effects because of oncoming light, for instance from the sun low in the sky.
• When it is dark outside.

Brake force display

Concept

Additional brake lights indicate emergency braking to the traffic behind. This can reduce the risk of a rear-end collision.

General information

• During normal brake application, the brake lights light up.
• During heavy brake application, the flashers additionally light up.

PostCrash - iBrake

Concept

In the event of an accident, the system can bring the vehicle to a halt automatically without intervention by the driver in certain situations. This can reduce the risk of a

further collision and the consequences thereof.

At standstill

After coming to a halt, the brake is released automatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling.

Harder vehicle braking

It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in certain situations to a halt quicker.

To do this, for a short time the braking pressure applied when stepping on the brake pedal must be higher than the braking pressure achieved by the automatic braking function. This interrupts automatic braking.

Interrupting automatic braking

It can be necessary to interrupt automatic braking in certain situations, for instance for an evasive maneuver.

Interrupt automatic braking:

- By pressing the brake pedal.

- By pressing the accelerator pedal.

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Anti-lock Braking System ABS

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking.

The vehicle maintains its steering power even during full brake applications, thus increasing active safety.

ABS is operational every time you start the engine.

Brake assistant

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically boosts the vehicle braking capability to the furthest possible extent. It reduces the braking distance to a minimum during emergency stop. This system utilizes all of the capabilities provided by the Antilock Brake System ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the emergency stop.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

Concept

Within the physical limits, the system helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.

General information

DSC detects the following unstable driving conditions, for instance:

• Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
• Loss of traction of the front wheels, which can lead to understeering.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to page 165, is a version of the DSC where forward momentum is optimized.

Safety information

WARNING

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Indicator/warning lights

The indicator light flashes: DSC controls the drive and braking forces.

The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunctioned.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

General information

When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in curves.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC

Press and hold this button but not longer than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up in the instrument cluster and displays DSC OFF.

DSC is switched off.

Activating DSC

Press button.

DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator

light go out.

Indicator/warning lights

When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The indicator light lights up: DSC is deactivated.

Automatic activation

When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation occurs in the following situations:

• The vehicle has a flat tire.
• When activating cruise control in TRACTION or DSC OFF mode.

DTC Dynamic Traction Control

Concept

DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability Control where forward momentum is optimized.

The system ensures maximum headway on special road conditions, for instance unplowed snowy roads or loose road surfaces, but with somewhat limited vehicle stability.

When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maximum traction. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in curves.

Drive carefully.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances:

• When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-covered roads.
• When driving off from deep snow or loose ground.
• When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control

Activating DTC

Press button.

TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up.

Deactivating DTC

Press button again.

TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator light go out.

Performance Control

Performance Control enhances the agility of the vehicle.

To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked individually when a sporty driving style is used.

Adaptive chassis

Concept

The tuning of the suspension can be changed with the system.

The system offers several different programs.

The programs are selected via the MINI Driving Modes switch.

Programs

MID/GREEN

Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for more comfort.

SPORT

Consistently sporty tuning of the shock absorbers for greater driving agility.

MINI Driving Modes switch

Concept

The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features. Choose between three different programs.

Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch will activate the particular program.

Operating the programs

MINI Driving Modes switch Program

	SPORT
	GREEN

SPORT

MID

GREEN

MID

MID provides balanced tuning.

With each starting operation, MID is activated using the Start/Stop button.

GREEN

Concept

GREEN, refer to page 222, provides consistent tuning to maximize range.

Activating GREEN

Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch

1. Activate GREEN.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Configure the program.
   This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure GREEN"
5. Select the desired setting.

This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

SPORT

Concept

Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain for greater driving agility.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the tuning of the chassis and suspension also changes and SPORT can be individually configured.

The configuration is stored for the driver profile currently in use.

Activating SPORT

Press the MINI Driving Modes switch upward until SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring SPORT

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure SPORT"
5. Select the desired setting.

This configuration is retrieved when SPORT is activated.

Configuring driving program

Settings can be made for the following driving programs in Driving mode:

• GREEN, refer to page 166.
• SPORT, refer to page 167.

Displays

Program selection

Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch displays a list of programs, which can be selected.

Selected program

The instrument cluster displays the selected program.

Drive-off assistant

Concept

This system supports driving off on uphill grades. The parking brake is not required.

Driving off with the drive-off assistant

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off without delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.

Servotronic

Servotronic is a speed-dependent power steering function.

The system provides the steering force with more support at low speeds than at higher ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance, and makes steering more direct when driving at faster speeds.

Furthermore, the steering force adapts according to the driving program, so that a direct, sporty feel or a comfortable steering response is conveyed.

Driving comfort

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Camera-based cruise control

Concept

Using this system, a desired speed and a distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel.

The system maintains the desired speed on clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle accelerates or brakes automatically.

If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as the given situation allows.

The distance can be adjusted in several steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the respective speed.

General information

A camera on the interior mirror is used to detect vehicles driving ahead.

Depending on the driving settings, the features of the cruise control can change in certain areas.

Safety information

WARNING

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

WARNING

The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted or called up by mistake. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

WARNING

Risk of accident due to too high speed differences to other vehicles, for instance in the following situations:

- When fast approaching a slowly moving vehicle.

– Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.

- When fast approaching standing vehicles.

There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer to page 170.

SET

Store/maintain speed, refer to page 171.

RESCNCL

Pause cruise control, refer to page 170.

Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 172.

Reduce distance, refer to page 171.

Increase distance, refer to page 171.

+

Increase speed, refer to page 171.

Reduce speed, refer to page 171.

Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's series, optional features and country specifications.

Camera

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.

Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror clean and clear.

Functional requirements

Speed range

The system is best used on well-constructed roads.

The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

The max. speed that can be set is 85 mph/140 km/h.

Active cruise control is paused below approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. The system does not brake to a stop.

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on

Press button on the steering wheel.

Display in the instrument cluster lights up.

Display in the instrument cluster lights up. The current speed is adopted as desired speed and diswith symbol.

Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Switching off

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting manually

Press button on the steering wheel.

Interrupting automatically

The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:

• When the driver applies the brakes.
• Manual transmission: when the clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not engaged.
• If selector lever position N is set.
• Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
• If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
• If the detection range of the camera is impaired, for instance by soiling, heavy precipitation or glare effects from the sun.
• If the vehicle in front decelerates below a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speed

Press +or button in the interrupted state.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.

The stored speed is displayed on the symbol.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

The speed can also be stored as follows:

Press button.

Changing the speed

+ or -button: press until the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.

- or button: each time it is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

- or button: each time it is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

+ or -button: hold down to repeat the action.

Adjusting distance

Safety information

WARNING

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to the system limits, braking can be late. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the distance to the traffic and weather conditions and maintain the prescribed safety distance, possibly by braking.

Reduce distance

Press button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the instrument cluster.

Increase distance

Press button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

The set distance is briefly displayed in the left part of the instrument cluster.

Continuing cruise control

General information

An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unintentional braking or accelerating may occur.

In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again:

• When the system is switched off.
• When the ignition is switched off.

Calling up stored speed and distance

Press button with the system inter- rupted. Cruise control is continued with the stored values. The selected distance is briefly displayed in the Info Dis- play.

Switching distance control on/off

Safety information

WARNING

The system does not react to traffic driving ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored speed. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic conditions and brake as needed.

Switching distance control off

Distance control can be switched off and on when driving with cruise control activated.

Press and hold this button.

Or:

Press and hold this button.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up.

To switch distance control back on, press one of the two buttons again briefly.

After changing over distance control, a Check Control message is displayed.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Desired speed and stored speed

In addition to the indicator light, the desired speed is displayed in the Info Display.

• Display lights up green: system is active, the display indicates the desired speed.
• Display lights up orange: system is interrupted, the display indicates the stored speed.
• No display: system is switched off.

If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not currently fulfilled.

Distance to vehicle ahead of you

Selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand portion of the Info Display.

Distance display

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4

This value is set automatically after the system is switched on.

Detected vehicle

Symbol lights up orange:

A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

Indicator/warning lights

Symbol flashes orange:

The conditions are not adequate for the system to work.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Symbol flashes red and a signal sounds:

Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if necessary.

The system has been interrupted or distance control is temporarily suppressed because the accelerator

pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was not detected.

Distance control is temporarily suppressed because the accelerator

pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was detected.

System limits

Detection range

The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited.

Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected.

Deceleration

The system does not decelerate in the following situations:

• For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly slow-moving road users.
• For red traffic lights.
• For cross traffic.
• For oncoming traffic.
• Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonworking lighting at night.

Swerving vehicles

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle.

If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected distance. It may not be possible to restore the selected distance in certain situations, including if you are driving significantly faster than vehicles driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.

Cornering

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly, although curves cannot be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.

The system has a limited detection range. Situations can arise in tight curves where a vehicle driving ahead will not be detected or will be detected very late.

When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After releasing the accelerator pedal the system is reactivated and controls speed independently.

Weather

The following restrictions can occur under unfavorable weather or light conditions:

- Poorer vehicle recognition.

- Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already recognized.

Examples of unfavorable weather or light conditions:

- Wet conditions.

-Snowfall.

- Slush.

- Fog.

- Glare.

Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for instance by braking, steering or evading.

Engine power

The desired speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails or was automatically deactivated.

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

• When an object was not correctly detected.
• In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
• In tight curves.
• If the field of view of the camera or the windshield are dirty or covered.
• When driving toward bright lights.
• Up to 20 seconds after the start of the engine, via the Start/Stop button.
  – During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.

Cruise control

Concept

Using this system, a desired speed can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the desired speed. The system accelerates and brakes automatically as needed.

General information

The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

Depending on the driving settings, the features of the cruise control can change in certain areas.

Safety information

WARNING

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

WARNING

The use of the system can lead to an increased risk of accidents in the following situations, for instance:

• On winding roads.
• In heavy traffic.
• On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet conditions, or on a loose road surface.

There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Only use the system if driving at constant speed is possible.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise control on/off, refer to page 176.

Store speed, refer to page 176.

Pause cruise control, refer to page 176.

Continue cruise control with the last setting, refer to page 177.

Button Function

Increase speed, refer to page 176.

Reduce speed, refer to page 176.

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on

Press button on the steering wheel.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up.

The current speed is adopted as the desired speed and is displayed with the symbol in the instrument cluster.

Cruise control is active and maintains the set speed.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Switching off

Press button on the steering wheel.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting manually

When active, press the button on the steering wheel.

Interrupting automatically

The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:

- When the driver applies the brakes.

• If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not engaged.
• If the gear engaged is too high for the current speed.
• If selector lever position N is set.
• Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
• If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.

Setting the speed

Maintaining/storing the speed

Press +or button in the interrupted state.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.

The stored speed is displayed in the instrument cluster.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

The speed can also be stored as follows:

Press button.

Changing the speed

+ or —button: press until the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.

• or button: each time it is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
• or button: each time it is pressed past the resistance point, the desired

speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

- or button: pressing it to the resistance point and holding it accelerates or decelerates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the button is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Continuing cruise control

General information

An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed.

Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unintentional braking or accelerating may occur.

Calling up stored speed

Press button on the steering wheel.

The stored speed is reached again and maintained.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Indicator light

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the indicator light in the instrument cluster indicates whether

the system is switched on.

Desired speed and stored speed

The desired speed is displayed together with the symbol.

• Display lights up green: system is active, the display indicates the desired speed.
• Display lights up orange: system is interrupted, the display indicates the stored speed.
• No display: system is switched off.

If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the conditions necessary for operation are not currently fulfilled.

System limits

Engine power

The desired speed is also maintained down-hill, but may not be maintained on uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.

PDC Park Distance Control

Concept

PDC is a support when parking. The system detects objects behind the vehicle. If the vehicle is equipped with front PDC, objects in front of the vehicle are detected too. Objects that you are approaching slowly are indicated by signal tones and a visual display.

General information

The ultrasound sensors for measuring the distances are located in the bumpers.

The maneuvering range, depending on obstacles and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.

An acoustic warning is first given in the following situations:

• By the front middle sensors and the two corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the object.
• By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.
• When a collision is imminent.

Safety information

WARNING

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

! WARNING

Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance Control is activated, the warning can be delayed due to physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control is not yet active.

Overview

With front PDC: button in vehicle

Park assistance button

Ultrasound sensors

Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, for instance in the bumpers.

Functional requirements

Ensure full functionality:

• Do not cover sensors, for instance with stickers, bicycle racks.
• Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system switches on automatically in the following situations:

- If selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running.

The rearview camera also switches on.

- With front PDC: when obstacles are detected behind or in front of the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.

With front PDC: automatic activation on obstacle detection can be switched off. Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending on the vehicle equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC activation"

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel

The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

With front PDC: switching on/off manually

Press park assistance button.

• On: the LED lights up.
• Off: the LED goes out.

The rearview camera image is displayed if the reverse gear is engaged when pressing the park assistance button.

WARNING

Signal tones

When approaching an object, an intermittent sound indicates the position of the object. E.g., if an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.

The shorter the distance to the object, the shorter the intervals.

If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded.

With front PDC: if objects are simultaneously located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is sounded.

The signal tone is switched off, when selector lever position P is engaged on vehicles with Steptronic transmission.

Volume

The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the entertainment volume can be adjusted.

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Tone"
4. "Volume settings"
5. "PDC"
6. Set the desired value.

The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Visual warning

The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are already displayed on the Control Display before a signal sounds.

A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated.

The range of the sensors is represented in colors: red, green and yellow.

When the image of the rearview camera is displayed, the switch can be made to PDC:

"Rear view camera"

System limits

Safety information

WARNING

The system can react not at all, too late, incorrectly, or without justification due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Follow the information regarding the system limits and actively intervene if needed.

With rear luggage rack or when the trailer power socket is in use

The rear PDC functions are switched off.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances:

• For small children and animals.

• For persons with certain clothing, for instance coats.

• With external interference of the ultrasound, for instance from passing vehicles or loud machines.

• When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position.
• If cargo protrudes.
• Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
• With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.
• With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
• With moving objects.
• With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.
• With objects with corners and sharp edges.
• With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences.
• For objects with porous surfaces.
• Low objects already displayed, for instance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.

False warnings

The system may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range:

• In heavy rain.
• When sensors are very dirty or covered with ice.
• When sensors are covered in snow.
• On rough road surfaces.
• On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
• In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls, for instance in underground garages.

• In automatic vehicle washes.

• Due to heavy exhaust.

• Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights.

The malfunction is signaled by a continuous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction due to other ultrasound sources is no longer present, the system is again fully functional.

With front PDC: to reduce false alarms, switch off automatic PDC activation on obstacle detection, for instance in vehicle washes; see Switching on/off.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Red symbol is displayed, and the range of the sensors is dimmed on the Control Display.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Rearview camera

Concept

The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.

Safety information

WARNING

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle

surroundings closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Depending on the vehicle equipment: button in the vehicle

Park assistance button

Camera

The camera lens is located in the handle of the tailgate.

The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If necessary, clean the camera lens.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is switched on automatically if selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel

The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on, if needed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment: switching on/off manually

Press park assistance button.

- On: the LED lights up.

- Off: the LED goes out.

The parking assistance functions are shown on the Control Display.

Switching the view via the Central Information Display (CID)

If the rearview camera view is not displayed, change the view via the Central Information Display (CID):

"Rear view camera"

The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirement

- The rearview camera is switched on.

- The trunk lid is fully closed.

- Keep the recording range of the camera clear.

Protruding cargo or carrier systems that are not connected to a trailer power socket can lead to malfunctions.

Activating assistance functions

More than one assistance function can be active at the same time.

The zoom function for trailer operation can only be activated separately.

- Parking aid lines

"Parking aid lines"

Lanes and turning radius are indicated.

- Obstacle marking

P_G "Obstacle marking"

Obstacles are marked, depending on the vehicle equipment.

- Trailer hitch

"Trailer hitch - zoom"

A zoomed image of the trailer hitch is shown.

Pathway lines

Pathway lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera.

Pathway lines help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads.

Pathway lines depend on the current steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements.

Turning radius lines

Turning radius lines can be superimposed on the image of the rearview camera.

Turning radius lines show the course of the smallest possible turning radius on a level road.

Only one turning radius line is displayed after the steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.

Obstacle marking

Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera.

The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings match the markings of the PDC Park Distance Control.

Zoom on trailer hitch

To make it easier to attach a trailer, you can zoom in on the view of the trailer hitch.

Two static circle segments show the distance between the trailer and the trailer hitch.

A docking line dependent on the steering angle helps with aiming for the trailer with the trailer hitch.

The zoom function can be activated when the camera is switched on.

When zooming in, remember that the view may no longer show certain obstacles.

If necessary, the zoom function can also be activated when a rear luggage rack is used.

Parking using pathway and turning radius lines

1. Position the vehicle so that the turning radius lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.

1. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning radius line.

Display settings

Brightness

With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is reached and press the Controller.

Contrast

With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is reached and press the Controller.

System limits

Detection of objects

Very low obstacles or high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be recognized by the system.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, some assistance functions also consider data from the PDC Park Distance Control.

Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Control chapter.

The objects displayed on the Control Display may be closer than they appear. There-

fore, do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display.

Parking assistant

Concept

This system assists the driver in parking parallel to the road.

General information

Parking assistant handling is divided into three steps:

- Switching on and activating.

- Parking space search.

- Parking.

Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

The parking assistant calculates the best possible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure.

System status and instructions on required actions are displayed on the Control Display.

A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control.

Safety information

WARNING

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

WARNING

If the trailer hitch is used, the parking assistant can cause damage due to covered sensors. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. The parking assistant should not be used during trailer towing or if the trailer hitch is used, for instance bicycle rack.

NOTICE

The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to property. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

The safety information of the PDC Park Distance Control applies in addition.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Park assistance button

Ultrasound sensors

The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking spaces are located on the wheel housing.

Functional requirements

Ultrasound sensors

Ensure full functionality:

• Do not cover sensors, for instance with stickers.
• Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.

For measuring parking spaces

- Maximum speed while driving forward approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.

- Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space

• Gaps behind an object that has a min. length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
• Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
• Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx. 3.3 ft/1.0 m.
• Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking

• Doors and tailgate are closed.
• The parking brake is released.
• When parking in parking spaces on the driver's side, the corresponding turn signal must be switched on.

Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button

Press park assistance button. The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. Parking assistant is activated automatically.

Switching on with reverse gear

Shift into reverse.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

To activate: P"Parking Assistant"

Display on the Control Display

System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not available.

White: the system is available but not activated.

The system is activated.

Parking space search and system status

• Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking assistant is activated and the parking space search is active.
• Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are highlighted.
• The parking procedure is

active. Steering control has been taken over by system.

- Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the displays on the Control Display are shown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistant

Parking

1. P is the park assistance button or shift into reverse gear to switch on the parking assistant, refer to page 185. Activate the parking assistant, if needed.

Parking assistant is activated.

1. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.

The status of the parking space search and possible parking spaces are displayed on the display, refer to page 186.

1. Follow the instructions on the display.

The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the stationary vehicle - wait for the automatic steering wheel move.

The end of the parking procedure is indicated on the display.

1. Adjust the parking position yourself, if needed.

Interrupting manually

The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time:

- Press park assistance button.

- "Parking Assistant"

Interrupting automatically

The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations:

- If the driver grasps the steering wheel or takes over steering.

- If a gear is selected that does not match the instruction on the display.

• If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph / 10 km / h .
• Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road surfaces.
• If a maximum number of parking attempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
• If the PDC Park Distance Control displays clearances that are too small.
• When switching into other functions of the radio.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Resuming

An interrupted parking procedure can be continued, if needed.

Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to page 185, and follow the instructions on the display.

Switching off

The system can be switched off as follows:

- Press park assistance button.

- Switching off the ignition.

System limits

Safety information

WARNING

The system can react not at all, too late, incorrectly, or without justification due to the system limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Follow the information regarding the system limits and actively intervene if needed.

No parking assistance

The parking assistant does not offer assistance in the following situations:

• In tight curves.
• With mounted rear luggage rack.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

• On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads.
• On slippery ground.
• With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space.
• With a mounted emergency wheel.
• With ditches or edges, for instance an edge of a port.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances:

• For small children and animals.
• For persons with certain clothing, for instance coats.
• With external interference of the ultrasound, for instance from passing vehicles or loud machines.

- When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position.

- If cargo protrudes.

- Under certain weather conditions such as high relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.

- With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles.

- With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

- With moving objects.

- With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.

- With objects with corners and sharp edges.

• With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences.
• For objects with porous surfaces.
• Low objects already displayed, for instance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.
• The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking.

Tire size

The parking position may vary depending on the tire size.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed.

The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Climate control

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the following components:

- Emission tested car's interior.

- Microfilter.

- Air conditioning system to control the temperature, air flow and recirculated-air mode.

Depending on the equipment specification:

- Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

- Automatic climate control.

- Parked-car ventilation.

Air conditioner

1 Air distribution settings 2 Air flow

3 Temperature
4 Seat heating, right 85
5 Air conditioning
6 Recirculated-air mode

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on

Set any air flow.

Switching off

Turn the wheel for air flow all the way to the left.

Temperature

Concept

The system heats or cools, depending on the set temperature.

Settings

Turn the ring to set the desired temperature.

Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.

The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running.

7 Rear window defroster
8 Windshield defroster
9 Seat heating, left 85

Switching on/off

A/C

Press button.

The LED is illuminated with air conditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.

The air conditioner produces condensation water, refer to page 219, that will exit from below the vehicle.

Recirculated-air mode

Concept

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.

Operation

Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

• LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
• LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is permanently blocked.

To prevent window condensation, recirculated-air mode switches off automatically after a certain amount of time, depending on the external temperature.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the air quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the fogging of the windows increases.

If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.

Controlling the air flow manually

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Operation

Turn the ring to set the desired air flow.

The higher the air flow, the more effective the heating or cooling will be.

The air flow from the air conditioner may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Controlling the air distribution manually

Concept

The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Operation

Turn the wheel to select the desired program or the desired intermediate setting.

• Windows.
• Upper body region.
• Floor area.

- Windows, upper body region, and floor area.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Make the following settings to defrost the windows and remove condensation:

• Direct the air distribution onto the windows.
• Increasing the air flow.
• Increase the temperature.
• Switch on the air conditioning if needed.

Windshield defroster

Press button. The LED lights up.

The front window defroster

switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

Rear window defroster

Press button. The LED lights up.

The rear window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of time.

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heater output is reduced.

Microfilter

In external and recirculated-air mode the microfilter filters dust and pollen from the air.

Have this filter changed during vehicle maintenance, refer to page 292.

Automatic climate control

1 Temperature, left
2 Display
3 Air flow, AUTO intensity
4 AUTO program
5 Air distribution, manual
6 Display
7 Temperature, right
8 Seat heating, right 85

Climate control functions in detail

Switching the system on/off

Switching on

Set any air flow.

9 Maximum cooling

10 Air conditioning

11 Recirculated-air mode

12 Rear window defroster

13 Windshield defroster

14 Defrosting windows and removing condensation

15 Seat heating, left 85

Switching off

Turn wheel for air flow to the left until the control switches off.

Temperature

Concept

The automatic climate control achieves the set temperature as quickly as possible, if

necessary by using the maximum cooling or heating power, and then keeps it constant.

Settings

Turn the ring to set the desired temperature.

Do not rapidly switch between different temperature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.

Air conditioning

Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.

The car's interior can only be cooled with the engine running.

Switching on/off

Press button.

The LED is illuminated with air conditioning switched on.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.

The air conditioning is switched on automatically with the AUTO program.

When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 219, develops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is normal.

Maximum cooling

Concept

The system is set to the lowest temperature, maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode.

General information

The function is available with external temperatures beyond approx. 32 °F/0 °C and with the engine running.

Air flows out of the vents to the upper body region. The vents need to be open for this.

The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow active.

Switching on/off

Press button.

The LED is illuminated with the system switched on.

The system is set to the lowest temperature, optimum air flow and air circulation mode.

AUTO program

Concept

The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats the car's interior automatically.

The air distribution and temperature are controlled automatically depending on the temperature in the car's interior and the desired temperature setting including the selected intensity of the air flow.

Switching on/off

Press button.

The LED is illuminated with the

AUTO program switched on.

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity and outside influences, the

air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the floor area.

The following features are switched on automatically with the AUTO program:

- The air conditioning, refer to page 193.

To switch off the program: press the button again or manually adjust the air distribution.

Intensity

With the AUTO program activated, the automatic intensity control can be changed.

Turn the ring to set the desired intensity from soft to intensive.

The set intensity is displayed via the position of the illuminated LED segment.

Convertible program

When the convertible top is open, the convertible program is activated as well. In the convertible program, the automatic climate control is optimized for driving with the convertible top open. In addition, the air flow is increased as the vehicle speed increases.

The efficiency of the convertible program can be greatly enhanced by installing the wind deflector.

Recirculated-air mode

Concept

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.

Operation

Press button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

• LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
• LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is permanently blocked.

To prevent window condensation, recirculated-air mode switches off automatically after a certain amount of time, depending on the external temperature.

With constant recirculated-air mode, the air quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the fogging of the windows increases.

If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.

Controlling the air flow manually

Concept

The air flow for climate control can be adjusted manually.

General information

To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO program first.

Operation

Turn the ring to set the desired air flow.

The manually adjusted air flow is displayed via illuminated LED segments.

The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Controlling the air distribution manually

Concept

The air distribution for climate control can be adjusted manually.

Operation

Press button repeatedly to select a program:

• Windows, upper body region, and floor area.
• Upper body region and floor area.
• Floor area.
• Windows and floor area.
• Windows.
• Windows and upper body region.
• Upper body region.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Concept

Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side windows.

Switching on/off

Press button.

The LED is illuminated with the system switched on.

Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side windows.

The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow active.

If there is window condensation, switch on the air conditioning too.

Windshield defroster

Press button. The LED lights up.

The front window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

Rear window defroster

Press button. The LED lights up.

The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

When GREEN Mode is activated, the heater output is reduced.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

In external and recirculated-air mode the microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.

Have this filter changed during vehicle maintenance, refer to page 292.

Ventilation

Setting

The air flow directions can be individually adjusted:

- Direct ventilation:

The air flow is directly pointed onto the person. The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending on the adjusted temperature.

- Indirect ventilation:

If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air is directly routed into the car's interior.

Front ventilation

• Turn knob for continuous opening and closing of the vents.
• Swivel the vents to alter the direction of the vent flow, arrows.

Parked-car ventilation

Concept

The parked-car ventilation ventilates the car's interior and lowers its temperature, if needed.

General information

The parked-car ventilation can be switched on and off directly or by using two preset activation times. The system remains switched on for 30 minutes.

The parked-car ventilation system is operated via the Central Information Display (CID).

Functional requirements

• Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-ready state.
• Direct operation or preset activation time: does not depend on external temperature.
• Battery is sufficiently charged. If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the vehicle battery will be discharged.

Thus, limit the maximum activation time to save the vehicle battery. The system will be available again after the engine is started or after a short trip.

• Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.
• Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"

The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes if the system is switched on.

Preselecting the activation time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Comfort ventilation"
5. Select the desired activation time.
6. Set the desired time.

Activating the activation time

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "For start time at:"

Activate the desired activation time.

The symbol on the automatic climate control lights up when the activation time is activated.

The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes when the system has been switched on.

The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reactivated.

Interior equipment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Integrated Universal Remote Control

Concept

The integrated Universal Remote Control in the interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled systems, such as garage door drives, barriers, or lighting systems. The integrated Universal Remote Control replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior mirror must be programmed with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control.

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security.

Safety information

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when operating remote-controlled systems, such as the garage door, using the integrated Universal Remote Control. There is a risk of injury or

risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held transmitter.

Compatibility

If this symbol is printed on the packaging or in the owner's manual of the system to be controlled, the system is generally compatible with the integrated Universal Remote Control.

If you have any questions, please contact:

- A dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

- www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.

Overview

1 LED
2 Programmable keys
3 Hand-held transmitters of the system

Programming

General information

1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror flashes. This erases all programming of the buttons on the interior mirror.

1. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.
2. Simultaneously press and hold the button of the desired function on the handheld transmitter and the button to be programmed on the interior mirror. The LED on the interior mirror will begin flashing slowly.
3. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing faster indicates that the button on the interior mirror has been programmed.

If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance between the interior mirror and the hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts.

Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.

1. To program other functions on other buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be controlled using the interior mirror buttons.

Special feature of the rolling code wireless system

If you are unable to operate the system after repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features a rolling code radio system.

Read the system's owner's manual, or press the programmed button on the interior mirror longer. If the LED on the interior mirror starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system features a rolling code radio system. Flashing and continuous illumination of the LED will repeat for approximately 20 seconds.

For systems with a rolling code radio system, the integrated Universal Remote Control and the system also have to be synchronized.

Please read the owner's manual to find out how to synchronize the system.

Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second person.

Synchronizing the universal remote control with the system:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, repeat this step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once synchronization is complete, the programmed function will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons

1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the interior mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing faster indicates that the button on the interior mirror has been programmed. The system can then be controlled by the button on the interior mirror.

If the LED does not flash faster after at most 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the programming starting with step 4. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts.

Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.

Operation

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when operating remote-controlled systems, such as the garage door, using the integrated Universal Remote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective

system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information of the hand-held transmitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior mirror LED stays lit while the wireless signal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functions

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror flashes rapidly. All stored functions will be deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.

Digital compass

Overview

1 Control button
2 Mirror display

Mirror display

The point of the compass is displayed in the mirror when driving straight.

Operating concept

Various functions can be called up by pressing the control button with a pointed object, such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how long the control button is pressed:

- Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.

- 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.

- 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.

- 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering setting.

- 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zones

Sets the particular compass zones on the vehicle so that the compass operates correctly; refer to World map with compass zones.

World map with magnetic zones

Procedure

1. Press and hold the control button for approx. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set compass zone appears in the mirror.
2. To change the zone setting, press the control button quickly and repeatedly until the number of the compass zone that corresponds with your location appears in the mirror.

The set zone is stored automatically. The compass is ready for use again after approximately 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass

The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following:

• The wrong compass point is displayed.
• The point of the compass displayed does not change despite changing the direction of travel.
• Not all points of the compass are displayed.

Procedure

1. Make sure that there are no large metallic objects or overhead power lines near the vehicle and that there is sufficient room to drive around in a circle.
2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Make sure that the convertible top is completely closed.
4. Press and hold the control button for approx. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass.
5. Open convertible top completely.
6. Press and hold the control button for approx. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass.

Left/right-hand steering

The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the language

Press and hold the control button for approx. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control button again to switch between English "E" and German "O".

Settings are stored automatically after approximately 10 seconds.

Sun visor

Glare shield

To provide protection against glare, fold the sun visor down or pivot it to the side.

Vanity mirror

A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind a cover.

Front passenger side dash- board

Decorative trim

Customized decorative trim panels for the dashboard on the front passenger side are available as original MINI accessories depending on the equipment specification.

Follow the assembly instructions.

Ashtray/cigarette lighter

Overview

The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in the center console.

Ashtray

In order to empty the ashtray, remove the ashtray from the cup holder.

Cigarette lighter

Safety information

WARNING

Contact with the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is held against the respective objects. There is a risk of fire and injuries. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle. Make sure that children do not use the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

Operation

Push in the cigarette lighter. The cigarette lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Sockets

Concept

The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the ignition is switched on or the engine is running.

General information

The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.

Do not damage the socket by using non-compatible connectors.

Safety information

WARNING

Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags, such as portable navigation devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's interior during unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt on-board network can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment.

NOTICE

If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

In the center console

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

In the cargo area

The socket is located on the right side in the cargo area.

USB interface

Concept

Mobile devices with USB port can be connected to the USB interface.

General information

Follow the information regarding the connection of mobile devices to the USB interface in the section on USB connections, refer to page 53.

In the center console

The USB interface is located in the front of the center console.

Storage compartments

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Safety information

WARNING

Loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

NOTICE

Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can damage the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use anti-slip pads.

Overview

The following storage compartments are available in the car's interior:

• Glove compartment on the front passenger side.
• Compartments in the doors.
• Storage compartment in the center arm-rest.
• Storage compartment in front of the cup holders.
• Storage compartments in the cargo area.
• Storage tray in the center console.
• Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.

Glove compartment

Safety information

WARNING

Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the glove compartment can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the glove compartment immediately after using it.

Opening

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Closing

Fold up the cover.

Locking

The glove compartment can be locked with an integrated key to separately secure the tailgate, for instance.

This prevents access to the glove compartment and to the cargo area.

After the glove compartment is locked, the remote control can be handed over, such as at a hotel, without the integrated key.

Compartments in the doors

General information

There are storage compartments in the doors.

Safety information

WARNING

Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or glasses, can break in the event of an accident or a braking or evasive maneuver.

Broken glass can be scattered in the car's

interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not use any breakable objects while driving. Only stow breakable objects in closed storage compartments.

Center armrest

General information

The center armrest contains a storage compartment.

Opening

Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm-rest upward, arrow 2.

Adjusting the height

Press button, arrow 1, and swing center armrest upward or downward into the desired height, arrow 2.

Cup holders

Safety information

NOTICE

Unsuitable containers in the cup holder and hot beverages can damage the cup holder and increase the risk of injury in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Use light-weight, unbreakable, and sealable containers. Do not transport hot beverages. Do not force objects into the cup holder.

Front

In the center console.

Rear

In front of the rear seats.

Cargo area

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Loading

Safety information

WARNING

High gross weight can overheat the tires, damage them internally and cause a sudden drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics may be negatively impacted, reducing lane stability, lengthening the braking distances and changing the steering response. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the permitted load capacity of the tires and never exceed the permitted gross weight.

WARNING

Loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with

a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's interior.

WARNING

Improperly stowed objects can shift and be thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the event of an accident or during braking and evasive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects and cargo properly.

NOTICE

Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

1. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
2. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo.

The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing and securing cargo

• Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
• Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests.
• Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.

• If necessary, fold down the rear back-rests to stow large cargo.

• Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests.

• Small and light cargo: secure with ratchet straps or draw straps.
• Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo straps.

Loading aid

Concept

For easier loading, the vehicle is equipped with loading aid. When the loading aid is opened, objects can be stowed that would not otherwise fit through the tailgate opening.

Safety information

WARNING

When opening and closing the loading aid, body parts can be jammed, for instance by the mechanism. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the loading aid is clear during operation.

WARNING

With a lifted loading aid, vehicle parts can protrude and limit the view. There is a danger of accidents and property damage. Before driving off, make sure that the loading aid is completely lowered and the trunk lid is closed.

Opening the loading aid

1. Unlock the convertible top using the handles, arrows 1.

1. Lift convertible top, arrow 2.
2. Fold back the handles and place on the brackets, arrows 3.

Closing the loading aid

1. Remove handles from the brackets.
2. Push convertible top down and hold.
3. Push the handles outward to lock the convertible top.
4. Check that the convertible top is locked.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

To secure the cargo there are two lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Storage space under cargo floor panel

Located under the cargo floor panel on the right side is a trough for the onboard vehicle tool kit.

Fold the right side of the cargo floor panel upward to remove the onboard vehicle tool kit.

Enlarging the cargo area

Concept

The cargo area can be enlarged as follows:

• The rear seat backrests can be folded down.
• The cargo area partition can be swung upward when the convertible top is closed.

General information

The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts at a ratio of 50 to 50.

The rear seat backrests can be folded down from the cargo area.

Safety information

WARNING

Danger of jamming with folding down the backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the rear backrest and the of the head restraint is clear prior to folding down.

WARNING

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured cargo can be thrown into the car's interior; for instance, in the event of an accident, braking or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked after folding it back.

WARNING

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat adjustment or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head restraints or remove them.

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Folding down the rear seat backrest from the cargo area

1. Before the backrest is folded down, remove the respective safety belt from the rear belt guide, refer to page 87.
2. Pull the lever.

1. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.

Folding back the backrest

1. Fold up the backrest and press it into the latch. Make sure that the safety belt is not pinched.
2. Close the belt guide loop of the rear belt guide, refer to page 87.

Cargo area partition

1. Fold the convertible top upward as described under Loading aid, refer to page 210.
2. Swing the cargo area partition upward and pull backward out of the lower supports, arrows 1.

1. Insert the cargo area partition into the upper supports, arrows 2, until it engages and place down horizontally.
   The loading aid cannot be locked if the cargo area partition is not fully inserted into the upper supports.
2. Fold the convertible top downward as described under Loading aid, refer to page 210, and lock it.

Return the cargo area partition into the lower position so that the convertible top can be used.

i DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving 216

Saving fuel 221

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Breaking-in period

General information

Moving parts need to begin working together smoothly.

The following instructions will help you to achieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.

During break-in, do not use the Launch Control, refer to page 119.

Safety information

WARNING

Due to new parts and components, safety and driver assistance systems can react with a delay. There is a risk of an accident. After installing new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conservatively and intervene early if necessary. Observe the break-in procedures of the respective parts and components.

Engine, transmission, and axle drive

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed:

- For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h.

Avoid full load or kickdown under all circumstances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km

The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system

Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately during this break-in period.

Clutch

The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement

The same break-in procedures should be observed if any of the components above-men-

tioned have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes

Closing the tailgate

Safety information

WARNING

An open trunk lid protrudes from the vehicle and can endanger occupants and other traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not drive with the trunk lid open.

Driving with the tailgate open

If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided:

• If the convertible top is closed, close all windows and the sliding sun roof.
• Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
• Drive moderately.

Hot exhaust gas system

WARNING

During driving operation, high temperatures can occur underneath the vehicle body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas system. If combustible materials, such as leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas system, these materials can ignite. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not remove the heat shields installed and

never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no combustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or during parking. Do not touch the hot exhaust gas system.

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle

WARNING

Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can influence one another. There is radiation due to the transmission operations of mobile phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. If possible, in the car's interior use only mobile phones with direct connections to an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual interference and deflect the radiation from the car's interior.

Hydroplaning

On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface.

This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.

Driving through water

General information

When driving through water, follow the following:
- Drive through calm water only.
- Drive through water only if it is not deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.

- Drive through water no faster than walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.

Safety information

NOTICE

When driving too quickly through too deep water, water can enter into the engine compartment, the electrical system or the transmission. There is a risk of damage to property. When driving through water, do not exceed the maximum indicated water level and the maximum speed for driving through water.

Braking safely

General information

The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard feature.

Perform an emergency stop in situations that require such.

Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Objects in the area around the pedals

WARNING

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for

the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning.

Driving in wet conditions

When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gently press the brake pedal every few miles.

Ensure that this action does not endanger other traffic.

The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it.

Hills

General information

Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and reduce brake efficiency.

You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if needed.

Safety information

WARNING

Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system.

WARNING

In idle state or with the engine switched off, safety-relevant functions, for instance engine braking effect, braking force boost and steering assistance, are restricted or

not available at all. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive in idle state or with the engine switched off.

Brake disc corrosion

Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination on the brake pads are increased by the following circumstances:

• Low mileage.
• Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all.
• Infrequent use of the brakes.
• Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning agents.

Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their response - generally this cannot be corrected.

Condensation water under the parked vehicle

When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops and collects underneath the vehicle.

Ground clearance

NOTICE

If ground clearance is insufficient, there might be contact with the front or rear spoiler, for instance when driving over curbs or entering into underground vehicle parking garages. There is a risk of damage to property. Ensure that there is sufficient ground clearance available.

Rear luggage rack

General information

Installation only possible with rear luggage rack preparation.

Rear racks are available as special accessories.

Securing

COOPER

COOPER S

The fixing points, arrow 1, and the socket, arrow 2, are located below the covers in the bumper.

Remove the covers before installing the rear luggage rack.

Loading

Because rear luggage racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response.

Therefore, note the following when loading and driving:

- Do not exceed the approved axle load and the approved gross vehicle weight.

- Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

Power consumption

Before starting to drive, check the function of the rear luggage rack lights.

The rear luggage rack lights must not consume more than:

- Turn signals: 42 watts per side.

- Rear lights: 50 watts per side.

- Brake lights: 84 watts in total.

- Rear fog lights: 42 watts in total.

- Backup light: 42 watts in total.

Driving on racetracks

Higher mechanical and thermal loads during racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This wear is not covered by the warranty. The vehicle is not designed for use in motor sports competition.

Saving fuel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The vehicle contains advanced technologies for the reduction of fuel consumption and emission values.

Fuel consumption depends on a number of different factors.

The implementation of certain measures, driving style and regular maintenance can influence fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo

Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached parts following use

Remove rear luggage racks which are no longer required following use.

Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerodynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Closing the windows

Open windows increase air resistance and therefore lead to greater fuel consumption.

Tires

General information

Tires can affect fuel consumption in various ways, for instance tire size may influence fuel consumption.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly

Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip.

Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling resistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.

Drive away without delay

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds.

This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

Look well ahead when driving

Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel consumption.

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.

By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you.

Avoid high engine speeds

Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.

If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift indicator, refer to page 128.

Use coasting conditions

When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.

For going downhill take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle roll.

The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Switch off the engine during longer stops

Switching off the engine

Switch off the engine during longer stops, for instance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion.

Auto Start/Stop function

The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle automatically switches off the engine during a stop.

If the engine is switched off and then re-started rather than leaving the engine running constantly, fuel consumption and emissions are reduced. Savings can begin within a few seconds of switching off the engine.

In addition, fuel consumption is also determined by other factors, such as driving style, road conditions, maintenance or environmental factors.

Switch off any functions that are not currently needed

Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and consume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic.

Switch off these functions if they are not needed.

Have maintenance carried out

Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. MINI recommends that maintenance work be performed by a MINI service center.

Also note the MINI maintenance systems, refer to page 292.

GREEN Mode

Concept

GREEN Mode supports a driving style that saves on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the engine control and comfort features, for instance the climate control output, are adjusted.

For Steptronic transmission:

Under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmission in the D selector lever position. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption. The D selector lever position remains engaged.

In addition, context-sensitive instructions are displayed to assist with an optimized fuel consumption driving style.

The achieved extended range is displayed in the instrument cluster as bonus range.

General information

The system includes the following functions and displays:

• GREEN bonus range, refer to page 224.
• GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to page 224.
• GREEN climate control, refer to page 223.
• Coasting driving condition, refer to page 225.

Activating GREEN Mode

Press the MINI Driving Modes switch downward until GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via MINI Driving Modes switch

1. Activating GREEN Mode.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Select the desired setting.

Via the Central Information Display (CID)

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle settings"

3. If necessary, "Driving mode"

4. "Configure GREEN"
5. Select the desired setting.

Activating/deactivating the functions

The following functions can be activated/deactivated:

• "GREEN speed warning":
• "GREEN climate control"

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

GREEN Limit

- Activate the GREEN Limit:

"GREEN speed warning":

A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of the set GREEN Limit is exceeded.

- Setting the speed for the GREEN Limit: "Tip at:"

Select the desired speed.

GREEN climate control

Climate control is set to be efficient.

By making a slight change to the set temperature, or adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the car's interior consumption can be economized.

The power output to the seat heater and exterior mirror is reduced.

GREEN potential savings

Shows potential savings with the current settings in percentages.

Display in the instrument cluster

GREEN bonus range

A modified driving style helps you extend your driving range.

This may be displayed as the bonus range in the instrument cluster.

The bonus range is shown in the range display.

The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled.

• Green display: efficient driving style.
• Gray display: modify driving style, for instance by backing off the accelerator pedal.

Efficiency display

A bar display in the instrument cluster indicates your current driving efficiency.

Mark in the left area, arrow 1: display for energy recovered

by coasting or when braking.

Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display when accelerating.

The efficiency of your driving style is shown by the position of the mark:

• Mark inside the green range: efficient driving style.
• Mark outside the green range: modify driving style, for example by backing off the accelerator.

GREEN tip, driving instruction

The GREEN tip indicates that your driving style can be modified to be more efficient, for example by backing off the accelerator.

Activating/deactivating the display

Activate information relating to the driving style and GREEN tips in the instrument cluster using the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "GREEN info"

GREEN tip, symbols

An additional symbol and text instructions are displayed.

Symbol Measure

For an efficient driving style, look well ahead when driving, accelerate conservatively, and delay accelerating.

Reduce speed to the selected GREEN speed.

Steptronic transmission: Switch from M/S to D and avoid manual shift interventions.

Symbol Measure

Manual transmission: Follow the shift instructions.

Manual transmission: Engage neutral for an engine stop.

Coasting

Concept

The function helps to conserve fuel.

To do this, under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmission when selector lever position D is set. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector lever position D remains engaged.

This driving condition is referred to as coasting.

As soon as you step on the brake or accelerator pedal, the engine is automatically coupled again.

General information

Coasting is a component of the GREEN driving mode.

Coasting is automatically activated when the GREEN driving mode is called via the MINI Driving Modes switch, refer to page 166.

A proactive driving style helps the driver to use the function often and supports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.

Functional requirements

The function is available in the speed range from approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to 100 mph/160 km/h.

- Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not operated.

• The selector lever is in selector lever position D.
• Engine and transmission are at operating temperature.
• With a camera in the area of the interior mirror: the system does not detect any vehicles ahead of you.

Operation via shift paddles

Concept

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the coasting mode can be influenced with the shift paddles.

Activating/deactivating coasting via shift paddles

1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right shift paddle.
2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the right shift paddle again.

To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.

Display

Display in the instrument cluster

The bar display below the tachometer is filled in green and the mark appears at the zero point. The tachometer shows the idle speed.

System limits

The function is not available if one of the following conditions applies:

• DSC OFF and TRACTION are activated.
• Cruise control is activated.
• If driving in the dynamic limit range.

• If driving on steep uphill or downhill grades.

• The battery charge state is temporarily too low.

• The vehicle electrical system is drawing excessive current.

ENTERTAINMENT

General information 230

Tone 232

Radio 234

Audio 242

General information

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Control elements

1 Waveband/satellite radio
2 Change entertainment sources
3 Sound output on/off, volume
4 Change station/track
5 Programmable memory buttons

Sound output

Safety information

WARNING

A high sound output volume can damage your hearing. There is a risk of injury. Do not adjust the volume too high.

Volume and sound output

- Turn the button to adjust the volume.

- Press the button to switch off the sound output. Pressing the button again restores the previous volume setting.

Audio recording playback is stopped during muting.

Entertainment sources

General information

Possible entertainment sources:

• Radio, refer to page 234.
• USB audio, refer to page 242.
• Bluetooth audio, refer to page 242.

Changing the entertainment source

On the radio:

1. Press the button.

A list of all currently available entertainment sources is displayed.

1. Press the button again to select an entertainment source.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "Media/Radio"

A list of all possible entertainment sources is displayed.

1. Select the desired entertainment source.

Via the button on the Controller:

1. Press the button.

The most recently selected entertainment source is played.

1. Press the button again.

A list of all currently available entertainment sources is displayed.

1. Select the desired entertainment source.

Adjusting the selection list of entertainment sources

It is possible to select which entertainment sources are displayed in the selection list. The entertainment source currently being played cannot be removed from the selection list.

1. "Media/Radio"

A list of all possible entertainment sources is displayed.

1. "Personalize menu"

2. Select the desired setting.

Tone

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The settings are stored in the currently used driver profile.

Treble, bass, balance, and fader

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Tone"

3. Select desired setting:

4. "Treble": treble adjustment.

5. "Bass": depth adjustment.
6. "Balance": left/right volume distribution.

7. "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.

8. To adjust: turn the Controller.

9. To store: press the Controller.

Volume equalization

Concept

An automatic increase of the volume can be set to compensate for the increasing driving noises at higher speeds.

Set automatic volume increase

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"

4. Select desired setting:

5. "Speed volume": ratio of entertainment volume to speed.

6. "PDC": ratio of the volume of the PDC signal tone to the entertainment volume.

The basic setting ensures that the signal tone is audible at any volume.

- "Gong": ratio of the volume of the signal tone, for instance for safety belt reminder, to the entertainment volume.

The basic setting ensures that the signal tone is audible at any volume.

- "Microphone": sensitivity of the microphone during a phone call.

The setting is adjusted while calling and is stored for the mobile phone used.

- "Speakers": volume of the loudspeakers during a phone call.

Audio recording playback is stopped during muting.

The setting is adjusted while calling and is stored for the mobile phone used.

Reset the tone settings

The tone settings are reset to the factory settings.

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"

Radio

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The settings are stored in the currently used driver profile.

AM/FM station

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment and country version, it may not be possible to receive AM stations.

Radio Data System RDS

Concept

RDS broadcasts additional information, such as the station name, in the FM wave-band.

It is recommended to switch on RDS.

Switching on/off

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM"

1. Press the button.

2. "RDS"

Selecting a station

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

The last station listened to will be played and the station list displayed.

1. Select the desired station.

Changing the station

On the radio:

Press the left or right button.

The previous or next station from the list of stations is played.

Storing a station

General information

A symbol on the highlighted channel indicates whether the channel has already been stored.

Symbol Meaning

Station is not stored.

Station is already stored.

Storing the station being played

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Save station"

The storage list is displayed.

1. Select the desired memory location.

Storing a station that is not being played

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Highlight the desired station.
4. Press the Controller and hold until the storage list is displayed.
5. Select the desired memory location.

The stations can also be stored on the programmable memory buttons, refer to page 46.

Selecting a station manually

Station selection via the frequency.

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Manual search"
5. To select the frequency: turn the Controller.
6. To store the frequency: press the Controller.

Renaming a station

When storing a station with RDS signal, the RDS information transferred during storing is accepted as the station name. This name can be changed.

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "FM"

3. Select the desired station.

4. Press the button.

5. "Rename to:" If necessary, wait until the name of the desired station appears.

6. Press the Controller to store this name.

Additional station information

Concept

If a radio station broadcasts radio text or radio text plus, this information can be displayed, for instance the track or performer of the music. Availability, content and sequence are set by the radio station.

Displaying additional station information

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Press the button.
5. "Station info"

HD Radio™ reception

Concept

Many radio stations broadcast both analog and digital signals.

General information

When setting a station with a digital signal, it may take a few seconds before the station plays in digital quality.

Information about HD Radio stations whose station name ends with ...HD or with ...HD1:

In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, the playback switches between analog and digital reception. In this case, switch off digital radio reception.

Information about HD Radio multicast stations whose station name ends with ...HD2, ...HD3, ...:

In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, there may be interruptions of the audible signal lasting

several seconds. The duration of the interruption depends on the reception.

Activating/deactivating digital radio reception

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Press button.
4. "HD Radio reception"

This symbol is displayed in the status line when the audio signal is digital.

Displaying additional information

Some stations broadcast additional information on the current track, such as the name of the artist.

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select a station.
4. Press button.
5. "Station info"

License conditions

HD Radio®

HD Radio Technology manu- factured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U. S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and "Arc" logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Satellite radio

General information

Before a channel can be played, you must subscribe to it via telephone. Several channels can be combined into specified packages.

Managing a subscription

General information

In order to enable or unsubscribe from channels, you must have reception. It is usually at its best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the status line.

Enabling channels

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Press the button.
4. "Show subscription info" The phone number and identification number of the radio are displayed.
5. Call the phone number to have the channel enabled.

You can unsubscribe from the channels again via this phone number.

Unsubscribing from channels

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Press the button.
4. "Show subscription info" The phone number and identification number of the radio are displayed.
5. Call the phone number to cancel your subscription to the channel.

Selecting channels

You can only listen to enabled channels.

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"

The last channel played will be played back and the channel list displayed.

1. Select the desired channel from the channel list.

To display information about the selected channel:

1. Highlight a channel.

2. Press the button.

3. "Channel information"

Adjusting display of the channel list

The display of the playback list can be adjusted.

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Change view"

5. Select the desired display:

- "Channel" The name of the channel will be displayed. - "Artist" The name of the artist playing will be displayed. - "Titles" The name of the track playing will be displayed.

Changing the channel

Press the button on the radio.

The next and/or previous channel from the channel list is played.

Storing a channel

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

A symbol on the highlighted channel indicates whether the channel has already been stored.

Symbol Meaning

Channel is not stored.

Channel is already stored.

To store the channel played:

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Save station"

The storage list is displayed.

1. Select the desired memory location.

Or:

1. Highlight the played channel.

2. Press the Controller.

The storage list is displayed.

1. Select the desired memory location.

To store a channel other than the one played:

1. Highlight the desired channel.

2. Press the Controller and hold until the storage list is displayed.

3. Select the desired memory location.

Or:

1. Highlight the desired channel.

1. "Save in presets"

The storage list is displayed.

1. Select the desired memory location.

The stations can also be stored on the programmable memory buttons.

Selecting a category

1. "Media/Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Move the Controller to the left.

4. "Category"
5. Select the desired category.

The subscribed channels from this category are displayed.

1. Select the desired channel.

Timeshift

General information

The channel you are currently listening to is stored in a buffer for up to an hour.

Prerequisite: the signal must be available.

The stored audio track can be played with a delay following the live broadcast. When the memory is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The memory is cleared when a new channel is selected or when the vehicle is switched off.

Opening the timeshift function

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Time shift"

Time shift forward/reverse

Within the stored recording, it is possible to jump to any point in time.

Press the button on the radio or turn the Controller.

You can jump to the next or the previous track.

Press and hold the button on the radio.

The recording is spooled forward or back.

Timeshift menu

Symbol Function

Go to the live broadcast.

Automatic timeshift deactivated/activated.

▷ / ||Playback/pause.

Automatic timeshift

With automatic timeshift, audio playback is paused for the following events.

• Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
• Activation of the voice activation system.
• Muting.

After that, audio playback is continued from the time of the interruption.

1. Move the Controller to the left.
2. To activate:

"Automatic time shift"

Deactivate:

"Automatic time shift".

Smart Favorites

General information

A maximum of 6 channels can be stored as Smart Favorites.

If a stored channel is selected, the current track will be played from the beginning.

Adding the current channel to Smart Favorites

1. Press the button.
2. "Add to Smart Favorites"

Removing the current channel from Smart Favorites

1. Press the button.
2. "Remove from Smart Favorites"

Selecting Smart Favorite

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Category"
5. Select a Smart Favorite. The subscribed channels from this category are displayed.
6. Select the desired channel.

Favorites

General information

A performer, a track, a league or a team can be stored as a favorite. If the stored favorite is played on a channel, a message appears on the Control Display. Up to 30 Favorites can be stored.

Storing the artist or track

It is only possible to store Favorites that are currently being broadcast. The channel information must be available.

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Add to favorites"
5. Highlight the performer or track, and press the Controller.

A symbol indicates whether the artist and track were already stored.

Symbol Meaning

Artist/track is not stored.

❤ Artist/track was already stored.

Storing the league or team

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Add to favorites"
5. "Add sports information"
6. Select the type of sport desired.
7. Select the desired team.

Activating/deactivating a notification

A notification can be displayed when a selected favorite is being played.

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Press the button.
4. "Manage favorites" The stored Favorites are displayed.
5. "Activate alert" Set a check mark to activate notification for the selected Favorites. Remove the check mark to deactivate notification for the selected Favorites.
6. Select the desired Favorites.

Opening the Favorites

If an activated favorite is played back, the following message is displayed for approx. 20 seconds: "Favorite on air!".

To change to the played Favorites:

Tap on the message on the Control Display. Or:

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Favorite alert"

Select the symbol while the message is shown.

The displayed favorite is played.

When the message disappears, the list of channels that is currently playing one of the stored Favorites can be displayed.

1. Move the Controller to the left.
2. "Category"
3. Select the Favorites list.

The channels that are currently playing a favorite are displayed.

1. Select the channel that you would like to change to.

Deleting Favorites

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Pres
4. "Manage favorites"

The stored Favorites are displayed.

1. Highlight the desired favorites.
2. Pres
3. "Delete entry"

Traffic Jump

General information

Traffic and weather information for a selected region is broadcast every few minutes.

Selecting a region

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"

3. Press the button.

4. "Configure jump"

5. Select the desired region.

Activating/deactivating Traffic Jump

You must have reception in order to activate or deactivate.

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Press the button.
4. "Configure jump"
5. "Jump to:"

Place a check mark to activate Traffic Jump.

Information for the selected region is broadcast as soon as it is available.

Remove the check mark to deactivate Traffic Jump.

Channel magazine

In the channel magazine, the current and subsequent program for each channel booked is displayed.

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. SiriusXM program guide"

Automatic update

About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of the channel names and positions. The update takes place automatically and may take several minutes.

System limits

- Reception may not be available in some situations, such as under certain environmental or topographical conditions. The satellite radio has no influence on this.

• Graphical contents can be received under certain circumstances.
• The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages next to tall buildings or near trees, mountains or other powerful sources of radio interference.

Stored stations

General information

Up to 40 stations can be stored.

Selecting a station

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.

Deleting a station

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Highlight the station you want to delete.
4. Press the button.
5. "Delete entry"

Audio

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Music tracks, audio books, and podcasts can be played back. Sound is played back through the vehicle loudspeakers.

Settings are stored for the driver profile currently used.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following audio sources can be used:

Symbol Meaning

USB storage device.

Bluetooth audio.

USB storage device

playable formats

Popular audio formats such as MP3, AAC or WMA can be played.

Apple iPod/iPhone

The music search and playback of Apple iPod/iPhone are supported.

Audio player and storage media with USB port

Information on all music tracks, for instance artist, genre or track, as well as playback lists, are transmitted into the vehicle. This may take some time, depending on the USB storage device, file size, and number of tracks.

During the transfer, the tracks can be called up via the file directory.

The information for approx. 10,000 tracks can be stored in the vehicle.

Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management DRM cannot be played.

Selecting the USB storage device

Information on the USB interface, refer to page 204.

1. Connect the USB storage device to the USB interface.
   The adapter cable supplied with the USB storage device would be ideal.
2. "Media/Radio"
3. "USB"
   Or:
   Select the name of the USB storage device.
   Further playback descriptions, refer to page 243.

Bluetooth audio

General information

- Playback of music files on external devices such as audio devices or mobile phones via Bluetooth.

• The volume of the sound output depends on the device. If necessary, adjust the volume on the device.
• Up to four external devices can be connected to the vehicle.

Functional requirements

• Bluetooth device is connected to the vehicle.
• Bluetooth audio playback was activated.

Selecting the Bluetooth device

1. "Media/Radio"
2. Select the desired Bluetooth device from the list.

Further playback descriptions, refer to page 243.

If the Bluetooth device is not listed in the device list, Bluetooth audio playback may have not been activated. To activate Bluetooth audio playback, proceed as follows:

1. "Media/Radio"
2. "Manage mobile devices"
3. Select the desired Bluetooth device.
4. "Bluetooth® audio"

Playback

General information

Once an audio source has been selected, information on playback appears on the Control Display.

Information available for the current track followed by the playback list is shown on the Control Display. Content and scope of the playback list depend on the type of the selected playback source and the search criteria applied.

For USB and Bluetooth devices, the selected playback list is displayed. This can be the result of a search or of a previously stored playback list.

Further functions are displayed by moving the Controller to the left. The scope of these functions depends on the selected audio source.

Depending on the supported Bluetooth version, some Bluetooth device functions may not be available when using the Central Information Display (CID). If necessary, the missing functions can be accessed directly on the device itself.

Selecting a track

Select the desired track from the playlist. Starting with the selected track, all tracks of the playback list are played.

Changing the track

On the radio:

Press the left or right button.

The previous or next track from the playlist is played.

Fast forward/reverse

On the radio:

Press and hold the left or right button.

Search criteria

General information

The possible search criteria depend on the selected audio source.

Searching for track information

The following search criteria refer to the data stored in the track information.

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Media search"

3. Select desired setting:

- "Search"

All the tracks containing the search string are displayed. Entering more characters will continue to narrow down the search results.

Tilt the Controller to the right to display the list of results.

- "Genres"

A list of all available genres is displayed.

Select a genre to display all respective artists.

- "Artists"

A list of all available artists is displayed.

Select an artist to display all respective albums and tracks.

- "Albums"

A list of all available albums is displayed.

Select an album to display all respective tracks.

- "Titles"

A list of all available tracks is displayed.

1. Select album, if needed.

2. Select the track at which the playback is going to begin.

The search for artists and titles can also be selected directly.

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Artists" or "Titles"

Tracks where the selected search criterion is not stored are summarized under "unknown". Tracks without track information can only be found via the directory structure.

Search playlists

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Media search"

3. "Playlists"

A list of all available playback lists is displayed.

1. Select the playback list.

2. Select the track at which the playback is going to begin.

Information on playback appears on the Control Display. A playback list is created from the search results.

Search audio books and podcasts

Depending on the USB storage device and equipment, separate audio book and podcast searches are possible.

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Media search"

3. Select desired setting:

- "Podcasts"

A list of all available podcasts is displayed.

- "Audio books"

A list of all available audio books is displayed.

1. Select the track at which the playback is going to begin.

Information on playback appears on the Control Display. A playback list is created from the search results.

Search directory structure

It is possible to search the USB storage devices via the directory structure.

The names of folders and tracks correspond to folder and file names. The folder and file names can deviate from the names in the track information.

1. Move the Controller to the left.
2. "Media search"
3. "Browse folder"
4. Change into a sub folder, if needed.

Select the track at which the playback is going to begin.

Information on playback appears on the Control Display. A playback list is created from the search results.

Random playback

Concept

The current playlist or all tracks of the selected audio source are played back in random order.

Select random

1. Move the Controller to the left.

2. "Shuffle"

COMMUNICATION

Telephone 248

MINI Connected 252

Telephone

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Telephone functions

General information

Mobile phones can be connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth. Pair and connect the mobile phone with the vehicle, refer to page 51.

At high temperatures, the charge function of the mobile phone can be limited where appropriate and functions are no longer executed.

Do not operate a mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle on the mobile phone keypad, as this may lead to a malfunction.

When the mobile phone is used via the vehicle, refer to the owner's manual of the mobile phone.

Safety information

WARNING

Operating the integrated information systems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the systems

or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Incoming call

If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network, the name of the contact is displayed. Otherwise, only the phone number is displayed.

Accepting a call

Incoming calls can be answered in several ways.

– Via Central Information Display (CID):

"Accept"

- Press the button on the steering wheel.

Rejecting a call

"Reject"

Ending a call

– Via Central Information Display (CID):

"End call"

- Press the button on the steering wheel.

Last calls

The last outgoing, missed, and incoming calls are transferred to the vehicle.

Displays

1. "Communication"

2. "Recent calls"

3. The 20 last calls are displayed.

Filtering call list

1. "Calls:"
2. Select the desired setting.

Selecting number from list

Select from list. Call is established via the mobile phone.

To cancel: "End call"

Active calls

Adjusting the volume

Turn the volume button on the radio during the call, until the desired volume is reached. The setting is stored for the driver profile currently used.

Automatic volume equalization

1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Tone"
4. "Volume settings"
5. "Microphone" or "Speakers"
6. To adjust: turn the Controller.
7. To store: press the Controller.

Dialing a number

1. "Communication"
2. "Dial number"
3. Enter the numbers.
4. Select the symbol.

Holding, resuming

An active call can be put on hold and resumed later on.

- "Hold/Resume"

Call is put on hold.

- "Hold/Resume"

Call is resumed.

Muting the microphone

When a call is active, the microphone can be muted.

"Microphone"

The muted microphone is automatically activated:

• When a new connection is established.
• When switching between call parties.

DTMF suffix dialing

DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining access to network services or for controlling devices, for instance to make a remote inquiry of an answering machine. The DTMF code is needed for this purpose.

1. "Keypad dialing"
2. Enter DTMF code.

Calls with multiple parties

General information

You can switch between calls or connect two calls to a single conference call. These functions must be supported by the mobile phone and service provider.

Accepting a call while speaking to another party

If a second call comes in during an ongoing call, a call waiting signal sounds where appropriate.

"Accept"

The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold.

Establishing a second call

An additional call can be established while a call is active.

1. "Contacts"

2. Select new number.

The call is started and the first call is put on hold.

Switching between two calls, hold call

You can switch between two calls.

1. Establish two calls.

2. "Resume"

The call on hold is resumed.

Establishing a conference call

Two calls can be connected to a single telephone conference call. The calls must be made from the same mobile phone.

1. Establish two calls.

2. "Conference call"

Hands-free system

General information

Calls that are being made on the hands-free system can be continued on the mobile phone and vice versa.

From the mobile phone to the hands-free system

Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued on the hands-free system with standby state or the ignition switched on. The remote control must be located in the vehicle for this to work.

Depending on the mobile phone, the system automatically switches to the hands-free system.

If the system does not switch over automatically, follow the instructions on the display of the mobile phone. Refer also to the owner's manual of the mobile phone.

From the hands-free system to the mobile phone

Calls that are made on the hands-free system can in some cases be continued on the mobile phone; this depends on the mobile phone.

Follow the instructions on the display of the mobile phone. Refer also to the owner's manual of the mobile phone.

Contacts

General information

Contacts from the mobile phone are transferred and displayed. Contact pictures can be displayed, if the mobile phone supports this function.

Displaying all contacts

1. "Communication"

2. "Contacts"

The contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of contacts, contact search and quick search are offered.

Contact search

Contact search is available with more than 30 contacts.

1. "Search"

2. Enter the letters.

The hits are displayed on the right side.

1. Move the Controller to the right.

2. Select the contact to display it.

Quick search in lists

Quick search is available starting from 30 contacts. All letters, for which there are entries, are displayed in alphabetical order on the left of the Control Display.

1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.

All letters, for which contacts are stored, are displayed on the left.

1. Select the first letter of the desired contact.

The first entry of the selected letter is displayed.

Sorting contacts

Contact names can be displayed in a different order. Depending on how the contacts were stored on the mobile phone, the sorting order of the contacts may differ from the selected sorting order.

1. Press the button.

2. "Sort contacts"

3. "Last name" or "First name"

Voice command response

A connected smartphone can be used via voice operation.

Activate voice command response on the smartphone for this purpose.

Button on the steering wheel	Function
	Press the button for at least 3 seconds. Voice command response is activated on the smartphone.

The symbol on the Control Display indicates that voice command response is active.

MINI Connected

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Safety information

WARNING

Operating the integrated information systems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Teleservices

Concept

Teleservices are services that help to maintain vehicle mobility.

General information

The offering depends on the equipment version of the vehicle and the country-specific variant.

For further information on the available services, the vehicle manufacturer recommends contacting a service center or customer support.

Teleservices can comprise the following services:

• Automatic Service Request, refer to page 252.
• Manual Service Request, refer to page 253.
• Teleservice Report, refer to page 253.
• Teleservice Battery Guard, refer to page 253.
• Your dealer's service center, refer to page 253.
• Roadside Assistance, refer to page 305.

Requirements

• Active MINI Connected contract or equipment version with intelligent emergency call.
• Cellular network reception.
• Ignition or standby state is switched on.

Automatic Service Request

The Teleservice data on the vehicle's service requirements is sent automatically to the service center by MINI prior to the service deadline. If possible, the service center will contact you to arrange a service appointment.

This way, the dealer's service center can plan the necessary work in advance. This shortens the duration of the service appointment.

Manual Service Request

Concept

Using a manually initiated Service Request, data on the vehicle's service requirements is directly sent by MINI to the service center. If possible, the service center will contact you to arrange a service appointment.

General information

A Service Request can be started via a Check Control message, refer to page 121.

Starting a Service Request

1. "MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "Teleservice Call"

Teleservice Report

Concept

Transmits technical data that is evaluated for the ongoing development of MINI products from the vehicle to MINI in regular intervals, if needed.

General information

The Teleservice Report is free of charge and is activated in vehicles that meet the following requirements:

• Certain technical requirements are met.
• Active MINI Connected contract.
• Equipped with intelligent emergency call.

Neither personal data nor position data is transmitted.

Teleservice Battery Guard

Concept

If the battery charge state falls below certain values, MINI will inform you or your

dealer's service center directly in defined cases or the next time the vehicle is started.

General information

If necessary and possible, the dealer's service center will contact you to arrange a service appointment.

The Battery Guard Teleservice is available on a country-specific basis and only in vehicles that meet certain technical requirements, such as vehicles which have an active MINI Connected contract.

Your dealer's service center

Concept

The preset service center is displayed and is possible to contact the service center.

General information

In special cases, for instance following a change of owner or a move, an adaptation of the entered dealer's service center may be necessary. This can be done by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Updating MINI Assist

Concept

Starts the manual update of all services available in the vehicle.

Updating services

1. "MINI Connected"

1. "Update MINI Services"

Customer support

Concept

Contact customer support for information on all aspects of your vehicle.

Calling customer support

1. "MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "Customer support"

The customer support is displayed and a voice connection is established. If a voice connection is not established, dial the number manually.

MOBILITY

Refueling 258

Fuel 260

Wheels and tires 262

Engine compartment 283

Engine oil 286

Coolant 290

Maintenance 292

Replacing components 294

Breakdown assistance 305

Care 313

Refueling

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to page 260, prior to refueling.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a driving range of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel promptly.

Fuel cap

Opening

1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge and open it.

1. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

1. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

Closing

WARNING

The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jammed and crushed during closing. The cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Pay attention that the retaining strap is not jammed or crushed when closing the cap.

1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction.

Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Follow the following when re-fueling

General information

When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes:

• Premature switching off.
• Reduced return of the fuel vapors.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly after refueling, otherwise the emissions warning light may light up.

Follow safety regulations posted at the gas station.

Safety information

NOTICE

Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling.

Fuel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Fuel recommendation

General information

Depending on the region, many gas stations sell fuel that has been customized to winter or summer conditions. Fuel that is available in winter, for instance helps make a cold start easier.

Gasoline

General information

For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.

Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as containing metal must not be used.

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refueling.

Ethanol should meet the following quality standards:

US: ASTM 4806-xx

CAN: CGSB-3.511-xx

xx: comply with the current standard in each case.

Safety information

NOTICE

Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel system and engine. Furthermore, the catalytic converter is permanently damaged.

There is a risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or add the following in the case of gasoline engines:

• Leaded gasoline.
• Metallic additives, for instance manganese or iron.

Do not press the Start/Stop button after refueling with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

NOTICE

Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and the engine. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to M100.

NOTICE

Fuel that does not comply with the minimum quality can compromise engine function or cause engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not fill with fuel that does not comply with the minimum quality.

CAUTION

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Additionally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude, may occur.

If drivability problems are encountered, we recommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI number — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.

Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled maintenance.

Recommended fuel grade

MINI recommends AKI 91.

John Cooper Works:

MINI recommends AKI 93.

Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the rated performance and consumption values.

Minimum fuel grade

MINI recommends AKI 89.

John Cooper Works:

MINI recommends AKI 91.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high external temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Tire inflation pressure

General information

The tire characteristics and tire inflation pressure influence the following:

• The service life of the tires.
• Road safety.
• Driving comfort.
• Fuel consumption.

Safety information

WARNING

A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure may heat up significantly and sustain damage. This will have a negative impact on aspects of handling, such as steering and braking response. There is a risk of an accident. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it as needed, for instance twice a month and before a long trip.

Tire inflation pressure specifications

In the tire inflation pressure table

The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 264, contains all tire inflation pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.

To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following:

• Tire sizes of your vehicle.
• Maximum permitted driving speed.

Checking the tire inflation pressure

General information

Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation pressure increases with the tire temperature.

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire inflation pressure.

The displays of inflation devices may under-read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.

Checking using tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table

The tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold tires or tires at the same temperature as the ambient temperature.

Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when the tires are cold, i.e.:

- Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded.

- If the vehicle has not moved again for at least 2 hours after a trip.

1. Determine, refer to page 262, the intended tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the current tire inflation pressure value deviates from the specified value.
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed onto the tire valves.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure

For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires. For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.

Checking the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel

Also check the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and correct it as needed.

Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/160 km/h

For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 264, and adjust as necessary.

These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door pillar.

Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
175/60 R 16 86H M+S XL RSC	2.5 / 36 2.3 / 33
175/65 R 15 84H M+S A/S Std
175/65 R 15 88H M+S XL Std
175/65 R 15 88rear XL Std
185/50 R 17 86H M+S XL RSC
195/55 R 16 87H M+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87V M+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87W RSC
205/45 R 17 88V M+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88V M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88W XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86W XL RSC
Emergency wheel	Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 115/70 R 15 90 M	4.2 / 60

COOPER S

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
195/55 R 16 87H M+S Std/RSC	2.6 / 38 2.4 / 35
195/55 R 16 87V M+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87W Std/RSC
175/60 R 16 86H M+S XL RSC	2.9 / 42 2.7 / 39
185/50 R 17 86H M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88V M+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88V M+S XL Std/RSC
205/45 R 17 88W XL Std/RSC
205/40 R 18 86W XL RSC

JOHN COOPER WORKS

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

185/50 R 17 86

2.9 / 42 2.7 / 39

H M+S XL RSC

205/45 R 17 88

W XL RSC

205/45 R 17 88

V M+S XL A/S

RSC

205/45 R 17 88

V M+S XL

Std/RSC

205/40 R 18 86

W XL RSC

Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

WARNING

In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could occur.

For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 265, and adjust as necessary.

Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

175/65 R 15 84 H

M+S A/S Std

175/65 R 15 88 H

M+S XL Std

175/65 R 15 88

rear XL Std

175/60 R 16 86 H

M+S XL RSC

185/50 R 17 86 H

M+S XL RSC

195/55 R 16 87 H

M+S Std/RSC

195/55 R 16 87

V M+S A/S RSC

195/55 R 16 87

W Std/RSC

205/45 R 17 88 V

M+S XL A/S RSC

205/45 R 17 88 V

M+S XL Std/RSC

205/45 R 17 88

W XL Std/RSC

205/40 R 18 86

W XL RSC

COOPER S

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
195/55 R 16 87H M+S Std/RSC	2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38
195/55 R 16 87V M+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87W Std/RSC
175/60 R 16 86H M+S XL RSC	3.1 / 45 2.9 / 42
185/50 R 17 86H M+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88V M+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88V M+S XL Std/RSC
205/45 R 17 88W XL Std/RSC
205/40 R 18 86W XL RSC

JOHN COOPER WORKS

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
185/50 R 17 86 H M+S XL RSC	3.2 / 46 3.0 / 44
205/45 R 17 88 W XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M+S XL Std/RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W XL RSC	3.4 / 49 3.2 / 46

Tire identification marks

Tire size

205/45 R 17 84 V

205: nominal width in mm

45: aspect ratio in %

R: radial tire code

17: rim diameter in inches

84: load rating, not for ZR tires

V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Maximum tire load

Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating - GAWR - on the certification label on the driver's door pillar. Divide the tire load by

1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the vehicle's Gross Axle Weight Rating - GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively.

Speed letter

Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h

R = 106 mph / 170 km/h

S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h

T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h

H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h

W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h

Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number

DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 2118

xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design

2118: tire age

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age

Recommendation

Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least every 6 years.

Manufacture date

You can find the manufacture date of the tire on the tire's sidewall.

Designation Manufacture date

DOT ... 2118 21st week 2018

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades

Treadwear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

RSC - Run-flat tires

Run-flat tires, refer to page 271, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall.

M+S

Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.

Tire tread

Summer tires

Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased risk of hydroplaning.

Winter tires

Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally required minimum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm.

The positions of the wear indicators are marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

Tire damage

General information

Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires.

Indications of tire damage or other vehicle malfunctions:

• Unusual vibrations.
• Unusual tire or running noises.
• Unusual handling such as a strong tendency to pull to the left or right.

Damage can be caused by the following situations, for instance:

• Driving over curbs.
• Road damage.
• Tire inflation pressure too low.
• Vehicle overloading.
• Incorrect tire storage.

Safety information

WARNING

Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There is a risk of an accident. If tire damage is suspected while driving, immediately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or transported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires, but have them replaced.

WARNING

Tires can become damaged by driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the higher the risk of tire damage. There is a danger of accidents and property damage. If possible, drive around obstacles, or drive over them slowly and carefully.

Changing wheels and tires

Mounting and wheel balancing

Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Wheel and tire combination

General information

You can ask the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop about the correct wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.

Safety information

WARNING

Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for instance due to contact with the body due to tolerances despite the same official size rating. There is a risk of an accident. The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type.

WARNING

Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a negative impact on the vehicle's handling and on the function of a variety of systems, such as the Anti-lock Brake System or Dynamic Stability Control. There is a risk of an accident. To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires with a single tread configuration from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer

for your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have the original wheel/tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehicle recommends certain tire brands. The tire brands can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.

New tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tires

WARNING

Retreaded tires can have different tire casing structures. With advanced age the service life can be limited. There is a risk of an accident. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not recommend the use of retreaded tires.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not recommend the use of retreaded tires.

Winter tires

Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads.

Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they usually do not provide the same level of performance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then attach a label showing the permissible maximum speed in the field of view. The label is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

With winter tires mounted, observe and do not exceed the permissible maximum speed.

Changing runflat tires

For your own safety, use only runflat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Rotating wheels between axles

Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs between the axles to achieve even wear. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and correct, if needed.

Storing tires

Air pressure

Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Storage

Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark place.

Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease, and solvents.

Do not leave tires in plastic bags.

Remove dirt from wheels or tires.

Run-flat tires

Concept

Run-flat tires permit continued driving under restricted conditions even in the event of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.

General information

The wheels are composed of tires that are self-supporting to a limited degree.

The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss.

Follow the instructions for continued driving with a flat tire.

Safety information

WARNING

Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for instance, your lane stability when braking is reduced, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will change. There is a risk of an accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Label

The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with RSC Run-flat System Component.

Repairing a flat tire

Safety measures

- Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground.

- Switch on the hazard warning system.

- Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.

- Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock.

- Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

- If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

Mobility System

Concept

With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the tires, which seals the damage from the inside.

General information

• Follow the instructions on using the Mobility System found on the compressor and sealant container.
• Use of the Mobility System may be ineffective if the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
• Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
• If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign objects if they are visibly protruding from the tire.
• Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant container and apply it to the steering wheel.
• The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the TPM wheel electronics replaced at the next opportunity.
• The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure.

Overview

Storage

The Mobility System is located under the cargo floor panel.

Sealant container

• Sealant container, arrow 1.
• Filling hose, arrow 2.

Observe use-by date on the sealant container.

Compressor

1 Sealant container unlocking
2 Sealant container holder
3 Tire pressure gage
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose

Safety measures

• Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground.
• Switch on the hazard warning system.
• Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.
• Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock.
• Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.
• If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

Filling the tire with sealant

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are colorless and odorless. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.

NOTICE

The compressor can overheat during extended operation. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes.

Filling

1. Shake the sealant container.

1. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of the sealant container. Do not kink the hose.

1. Slide the sealant container into the holder on the compressor housing, ensuring that it engages audibly.

1. Screw the filling hose of the sealant container onto the tire valve of the non-working wheel.

1. With the compressor switched off, insert the plug into the power socket inside the vehicle.

1. With the ignition switched on or the engine running, switch on the compressor.

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.

While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this point.

Checking and adjusting the tire inflation pressure

Checking

1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire pressure gage.

To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar must be reached.

Removing and stowing the sealant container

1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant container from the tire valve.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
3. Remove the sealant container from the compressor.
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is not reached

1. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distribute the sealant in the tire.
3. Screw the connection hose of the compressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

1. Insert the connector into the power socket inside the vehicle.

1. With the ignition switched on or the engine running, switch on the compressor.

If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached.

1. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.
2. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached

1. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.
2. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h.

Adjustment

1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the compressor directly onto the tire valve stem.

1. Insert the connector into the power socket inside the vehicle.

1. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least 2.0 bar.

2. Increase tire inflation pressure: with the ignition switched on or the engine running, switch on the compressor.

3. Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the button on the compressor.

4. Unscrew the connection hose of the compressor from the tire valve.

5. Pull the connector out of the power socket inside the vehicle.
6. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.

Continuing the trip

Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 152.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 148.

Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant container of the Mobility System promptly.

Snow chains

Safety information

WARNING

With the mounting of snow chains on unsuitable tires, the snow chains can come into contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Only mount snow chains on tires that are designated by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of snow chains.

WARNING

Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage tires and vehicle components. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according to the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.

Fine-link snow chains

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended as road-safe and suitable. Information regarding suitable snow chains is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Use

Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size:

- 175/65 R 15.

- 175/60 R 16.

- 185/50 R 17.

John Cooper Works:

185/50 R 17.

Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.

Do not initialize the run-flat tires after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings.

Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings.

When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if needed.

Maximum speed with snow chains

Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.

Changing wheels/tires

General information

When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel does not always need to be changed immediately when there is a loss of tire inflation pressure due to a flat tire.

If needed, the tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

DANGER

The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if all safety measures are observed, there is a risk of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not start the engine.

! DANGER

Supports such as wooden blocks under the vehicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle jack to bear weight. They have the potential to exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, causing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place supports under the vehicle jack.

WARNING

The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is provided in order to perform a wheel change in the event of a breakdown. The jack is not designed for frequent use; for example, changing from summer to winter tires. Using the jack frequently may cause it to become jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only use the jack to attach an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a breakdown.

WARNING

On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-resistant surface.

WARNING

The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle and for the jacking points on the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.

WARNING

If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking point provided for this purpose, the vehicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel housing.

WARNING

A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. While the vehicle is raised, do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Securing the vehicle against rolling

General information

The vehicle manufacturer recommends to additionally secure the vehicle against rolling away when changing a wheel.

On a level surface

Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to the wheel to be changed.

On a slight downhill gradient

If you need to change a wheel on a slight downhill grade, place chocks and other suitable objects, for instance a rock, under the wheels of both the front and rear axles against the rolling direction.

Lug bolt lock

Concept

The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The lug bolts can only be released with the adapter which matches the coding.

Overview

The adapter of the lug bolt lock is located in the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 294.

- Lug bolt, arrow 1.

- Adapter, arrow 2.

Unscrewing

1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.

2. Unscrew the lug bolt.

3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug bolt.

Screwing on

1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If necessary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug bolt.

2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening torque is 140 Nm.

3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screwing on the lug bolt.

Preparing the vehicle

- Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground at a safe distance from traffic.

- Switch on the hazard warning system.

- Set the parking brake.

- Engage a gear or move the selector lever to position P.

- As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

• Depending on the vehicle equipment, get wheel change tools and, if necessary, the emergency wheel from the vehicle.
• If necessary, set up a warning triangle or portable hazard warning light at an appropriate distance.
• Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling.
• Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are located at the marked positions.

Jacking up the vehicle

WARNING

Hands and fingers can be jammed when using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Comply with the described hand position and do not change this position while using the vehicle jack.

1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with your other hand, arrow 2.

1. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular recess of the jacking point closest to the wheel to be changed.

1. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.

1. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under load and continue turning the vehicle jack crank or lever with one hand.

2. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and at a right angle beneath the jacking point.

1. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and perpendicularly beneath the jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.

1. Crank up the vehicle jack until the entire surface of the jack is in contact with the ground and the wheel in question is

raised a maximum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off the ground.

Mounting a wheel

Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.

1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on and screw in at least two lug bolts in a crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
   If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the accompanying lug bolts may have to be used as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and tighten all lug bolts well in a cross-wise pattern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehicle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely.

After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tightening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area, if necessary.
   The nonworking wheel cannot be stored under the cargo floor panel because of its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next opportunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the run-flat tires.
   Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the nearest dealer's service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shop.

Emergency wheel

Concept

In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel can be used in place of the wheel with the defective tire. The emergency wheel is only intended for temporary use until the defective tire/wheel has been replaced.

General information

Mount one emergency wheel only.

Also check the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and correct it as needed.

Safety information

WARNING

The emergency wheel has particular dimensions. When driving with an emergency wheel, changed driving properties may occur, for instance reduced lane stability when braking, longer braking distance, and changed self-steering properties in the limit area. There is a risk of an accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Overview

The emergency wheel is housed in a well on the underbody of the vehicle. The screw connection of the emergency wheel is under the cargo floor panel, on the floor of the storage compartment for the onboard vehicle tool kit.

The wheel change tools are under the cargo floor panel.

Removing the emergency wheel

1. Loosen the nut using the wheel wrench from the onboard vehicle tool kit.

1. Remove the retaining plate.
2. Screw wheel lug wrench onto the thread and hold in place with one hand.

1. Unlock the locking hexagon of the emergency wheel well using the hexagon attached to retaining plate.

1. Lower the emergency wheel with the wheel wrench.
2. Unscrewing the wheel wrench

3. Pull out the well with emergency wheel under the vehicle toward the rear.

4. Remove the spacer and emergency wheel from the well.

5. Stow the well and spacer in the vehicle.

Replacing the tires

1. Have the damaged tire replaced.
2. Replace the emergency wheel with the new wheel.

Installing the emergency wheel

Have the emergency wheel installed back into the vehicle by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Engine compartment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle,

e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Overview

1 Filler neck for washer fluid
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Oil filler neck

4 Jump-starting, positive terminal

5 Jump-starting, negative terminal

6 Coolant reservoir

Hood

Safety information

WARNING

Improperly executed work in the engine compartment can damage vehicle components and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of personal and property damage. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that, in the effort to avoid such risks, work in the engine compartment be performed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

WARNING

The engine compartment accommodates moving components. Certain components in the engine compartment can also move with the vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

WARNING

There are protruding parts, for instance locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.

WARNING

An incorrectly locked hood can open while driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk of an accident. Stop immediately and correctly close the hood.

WARNING

Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the hood is clear during opening and closing.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

NOTICE

When the hood is closed, it must engage on both sides. Pressing again can damage the hood. There is a risk of damage to property. Open the hood again and then close it energetically. Avoid pressing again.

Opening the hood

1. Pull lever, arrow 1. Hood is unlocked.

1. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow 2. Hood can be opened.

Indicator/warning lights

When the hood is opened, a Check Control message is displayed.

Closing the hood

Let the hood fall from approx. 16 inches/40 cm, arrow.

The hood must engage on both sides.

Engine oil

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The engine oil consumption is dependent on your driving style and driving conditions.

Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling by taking a detailed measurement.

The engine oil consumption can increase in the following situations, for example:

• Sporty driving style.
• Break-in of the engine.
• Idling of the engine.
• With use of engine oil types that are classified as not suitable.

Different Check Control messages appear, depending on the engine oil level.

Safety information

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level corrected by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Electronic oil measurement

General information

The electronic oil measurement has two measuring principles:

• Monitoring.
• Detailed measurement.

When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, for instance when taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a detailed measurement.

Monitoring

Concept

The engine oil level is monitored electronically while driving and can be shown on the Control Display.

If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed.

A red indicator light indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.

Functional requirements

A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of normal driving.

Displaying the engine oil level

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

The engine oil level is displayed.

System limits

When making frequent short-distance trips or using a dynamic driving style, it may not be possible to calculate a measured value.

In this case, the measured value for the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed.

Detailed measurement

Concept

The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle is stationary and displayed via a scale.

If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed.

General information

During the measurement, the idle speed is increased somewhat.

Functional requirements

- Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.

- Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral position, clutch and accelerator pedals not depressed.

- Steptronic transmission: selector lever in selector lever position N or P and accelerator pedal not depressed.

- Engine is running and is at operating temperature.

Performing a detailed measurement

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "My MINI"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

4. "Measure engine oil level"

5. "Start measurement"

The engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.

Adding engine oil

General information

Only add engine oil when the message is displayed in the instrument cluster. The quantity to be added is indicated in the message displayed in the instrument cluster.

Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to page 288.

Safely park the vehicle and switch off the ignition before adding engine oil.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Safety information

WARNING

Operating materials, for instance oils, greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Follow the instructions on the containers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children.

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level corrected by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Overview

The oil filler neck is located in the engine compartment, refer to page 283.

Adding engine oil

1. Open the hood, refer to page 284.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.

1. Add engine oil.
2. Close the cap.

Engine oil types to add

General information

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine.

Only add the types of engine oil which are listed.

Safety information

NOTICE

Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not use oil additives.

NOTICE

Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk of damage to property. When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil rating.

Suitable engine oil types

Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating standards:

Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

BMW Longlife-14 FE+.

Alternative engine oil types

If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the following oil rating can be added:

Oil rating

API SL.

API SM.

API SN.

Viscosity grades

When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil belongs to one of the following viscosity grades:

Viscosity grades

SAE 0W-20.

SAE 0W-30.

More information about suitable engine oil ratings and viscosities of engine oils can be requested from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Engine oil change

NOTICE

Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion can cause increased engine wear and thus engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not exceed the service data indicated in the vehicle.

The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop change the engine oil.

MINI recommends MINI Original Engine Oil.

Coolant

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

Coolant consists of water and additives. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Information about suitable additives is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

WARNING

With the engine hot and the cooling system open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system with the engine cooled down.

WARNING

Additives are harmful and incorrect additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Do not allow additives to come into

contact with skin, eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives only.

Coolant level

Checking

There are yellow Min and Max marks in the coolant reservoir.

1. Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

1. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

2. The coolant level is correct if it lies between the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck.

Adding

1. Let the engine cool.

2. Open the hood.

3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

1. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

2. Close the cap.

3. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.

Disposal

Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant additives.

Maintenance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

MINI maintenance system

The maintenance system indicates required maintenance measures, and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the operational reliability of the vehicle.

In some cases, scopes and intervals of the maintenance system may vary according to the country version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated separately. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Condition Based Service CBS

Concept

Sensors and special algorithms take into account the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses these to calculate the need for maintenance.

The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile.

General information

Information on service requirements, refer to page 127, can be displayed on the radio.

Service data in the remote control

Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control. The dealer's service center can read this data out and suggest an optimized maintenance scope for the vehicle.

Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote control with which the vehicle was driven most recently.

Storage periods

Storage periods during which the vehicle battery was disconnected are not taken into account.

If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

Please consult your Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service requirements.

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that maintenance and repair be performed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance and repair work should be retained.

Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis

General information

Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Remove any devices connected at the OBD socket before locking the vehicle.

Safety information

NOTICE

The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intricate component intended to be used in conjunction with specialized equipment to check the vehicle's primary emissions system. Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diagnosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose, can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates risks of personal and property damage. Given the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle strongly recommends that access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equipment for purposes of properly utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehicle's emissions.

Emissions

- The warning light lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating.

Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

- The warning light flashes under certain circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter.

Replacing components

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Onboard vehicle tool kit

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the right side under the cargo floor panel or in a bag on the right side of the cargo area.

After use, secure the bag with the onboard vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.

Wiper blades

Safety information

NOTICE

The window may sustain damage if the wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade installed. There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper blade installed.

NOTICE

Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

Replacing the front wiper blades

1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper arms.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Open the wiper blade lock, arrow.

1. Pull the wiper blade down out of the holder on the wiper arm, arrow 1.

1. Pull the wiper blade free from the holder of the wiper arm, arrow 2.
2. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in reverse order.
3. Fold down the wiper arm.

Light and bulb replacement

General information

Lights and bulbs

Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you have appropriate work performed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not been described here.

A spare light box is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Follow the safety information, refer to page 295.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Some items of equipment use light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover as a light source. These light-emitting diodes are related to conventional lasers and are offi-

cially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Follow the safety information, refer to page 295.

Safety information

Lights and bulbs

WARNING

Bulbs can get hot during operation. Contact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they have cooled off.

WARNING

Work on switched-on lighting systems can cause short circuits. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When working on the lighting system, switch off the lights in question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufacturer's instructions.

NOTICE

Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

WARNING

Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not look directly into the headlights or other light sources. Do not remove the LED covers.

Headlight glass

Condensation can form on the inside of the headlight glass in cool or humid weather. When driving with the lights switched on, the condensation evaporates after a short time. The headlight glass does not need to be changed.

If despite driving with the headlights switched on, increasing humidity forms, for instance water droplets in the light, have the headlights checked.

Headlight setting

The headlight adjustments can be affected by changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight adjustment was changed, have it checked and, if necessary, corrected by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Front halogen lights, bulb replacement

Overview

Halogen headlights

1 Low beams/high beams

2 Turn signal

Bug light

1 Parking lights
2 Daytime running lights
3 Fog lights

Low beams/high beams

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 295.

Bulbs: HB2

1. Open the hood, refer to page 284.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow, and remove.

1. Pull off the connector.

2. Unclip spring clip, arrow, and fold down.

1. Remove the bulb from the headlight housing.
2. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order.

Turn signal

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 295.

Bulbs: PW21W

With white turn signal lights: PY21W

1. Turn the steering wheel.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 1, and remove.

1. Unscrew the inner cover counterclockwise, and remove it.

1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the bulb housing.

1. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
2. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order.

Parking lights/fog lights/daytime running lights

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 295.

Bulbs:

- Parking lights for halogen headlights: W5W Parking lights for LED headlights: W5W NBV.

- Daytime running light: PSX24W.

- Fog light: H8.

Replacing the bulbs

1. Turn the steering wheel.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 2, and remove.

1. Pull off the connector.

2. Remove the bulb holder.

3. Parking lights: turn the bulb holder, arrow 1, counterclockwise and remove.

4. Daytime running lights: squeeze the upper and lower locks of the bulb holder, arrow 2, and remove the bulb holder.

For better accessibility, remove the bulb of the fog light as needed.

- Fog lights: turn the bulb holder, arrow 3, counterclockwise and remove.

1. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
2. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order.

The daytime running lights bulb holder engages audibly, first below, then above.

LED front lights, bulb replacement

General information

All lights feature LED technology.

In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Tail lights, bulb replacement

Overview

Vehicles with a rear fog light

1 Side tail lights
2 Rear fog light
3 License plate light
4 Center brake light

Vehicle with two rear fog lights

1 Side tail lights
2 Rear fog lights
3 License plate light
4 Center brake light

Side tail lights

1 Tail lights
2 Turn signal
3 Brake light
4 Reversing lights

Side tail lights with Union Jack

1 Tail lights
2 Turn signals/brake lights
3 Turn signals/brake lights
4 Reversing lights

Side tail lights

Without Union Jack

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 295.

- Bulb, brake lights: H21W

- Bulb, turn signal: P21W

- Bulb, reversing lights: P21W

1. Opening trunk lid.
2. Remove left or right cover.

1. Through the opening, loosen the plug connector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder. Press the latches together, arrows 1, and remove the bulb holder.

1. Remove the bulb holder from the opening.
2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

- Arrow 1: brake lights

- Arrow 2: turn signal

- Arrow 3: reversing light

1. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fasteners.

With Union Jack

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 295.

Bulb, reversing lights: P21W

1. Opening trunk lid.

2. Remove left or right cover.

1. Turn the bulb holder for the reversing light, arrow, counterclockwise and remove it.

1. Remove the bulb holder from the opening.

2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.

1. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fasteners.

Central brake light and license plate lights

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 295.

The lights feature LED technology. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Vehicles with a rear fog light

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 295.

Bulbs: W16W

1. On vehicles with heat shield:

Loosen 3 screws, arrow.

1. Push the heat shield forward and the bumper back in order to be able to reach the fog light.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.

The wire is long enough to guide the socket down and through between any heat shield that may be installed and the bumper.

1. Replace nonworking bulb.

2. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse order of removal.

Vehicle with two rear fog lights

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 295.

Bulbs: W16W

Left rear fog light:

1. On vehicles with heat shield:

Loosen 3 screws, arrow.

1. Push the heat shield forward and the bumper back in order to be able to reach the fog light.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.

The wire is long enough to guide the socket down and through between any heat shield that may be installed and the bumper.

1. Replace nonworking bulb.

2. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse order of removal.

Right fog light:

1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.

The wire is long enough to guide the socket down and through between any

heat shield that may be installed and the bumper.

1. Replace nonworking bulb.
2. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse order of removal.

Side turn signal, bulb replacement

Follow the general instructions on lights and bulbs, refer to page 295.

Bulbs:

- With orange lens: W5W.

- With white lens: WY5W.

1. Open the hood. The covers of the side turn signal lights are on the left and right next to the hinges of the hood.

1. Loosen nuts of the cover by hand and remove the cover.

1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.

1. Replace the bulb.
2. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse order of removal. Insert the nuts of the cover and press down.

Side scuttles

Individual side scuttles for clicking into the side turn signals are available as original Mini accessories.

Follow the assembly instructions.

Vehicle battery

Maintenance

The battery is maintenance-free.

The added amount of acid is sufficient for the service life of the battery.

More information about the battery can be requested from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Replacing the vehicle battery

General information

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has been replaced. Once the battery has been registered again, all comfort features will be available without restriction and any Check Control messages displayed which relate to comfort features will disappear.

Safety information

NOTICE

Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of personal and property damage. Only vehicle batteries that are compatible with your vehicle type should be installed in your vehicle. Information on compatible vehicle batteries is available at your dealer's service center.

Charging the battery

General information

Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life.

A discharged battery is indicated by a red indicator light.

The battery may need to be charged in the following cases:

• When making frequent short-distance drives.
• If the vehicle is not used for more than a month.
• Steptronic transmission: when parked for long periods of time in selector lever position D, R or N.

Safety information

NOTICE

Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents, which means that the 12 volt on-board network can be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of damage to property. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle

battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment.

Starting aid terminals

In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 308, in the engine compartment with the engine off.

Power failure

After a power loss, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual settings updated, for example:

- Time: update.

- Date: update.

Disposing of old batteries

Have old batteries disposed of by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or take them to a collection point.

Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses

Safety information

WARNING

Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload electrical lines and components. There is a risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating.

Accessing the fuses

The fuses are located in the glove compartment.

1. Open the glove compartment.

2. Swing the cover down, arrow.

Information on the fuse types and locations, as well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is found on a separate sheet in the fuse box.

Replacing fuses

The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop replace the fuses.

Breakdown assistance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Hazard warning flashers

The button is located above the Control Display.

The red light in the button flashes when the hazard warning flashers are activated.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located in the cargo area.

First-aid kit

General information

Some of the articles have a limited service life.

Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly.

Storage

The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.

MINI Roadside Assistance

Concept

MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a breakdown.

General information

In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehicle's condition is sent directly to the manufacturer of your vehicle.

Contact can also be made via a Check Control message, refer to page 121.

Starting Roadside Assistance

If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, support is offered through Teleservice Diagnosis.

Via the Central Information Display (CID):

1. "MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"

The contact to the Roadside Assistance of the manufacture is established.

A telephone number is displayed, if needed. Select to dial the telephone number on a connected mobile phone.

Teleservice Diagnosis

Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that is important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is transmitted automatically.

Starting Teleservice Help

Depending on the country, the Teleservice Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle via wireless transmission.

You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting it through the Service Specialist.

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Control Display is switched on.
4. "Teleservice Help"

The driving ability of the vehicle can be restored for specific functions. If this is not possible, further measures will be initiated, for instance Roadside Assistance will be informed.

Intelligent emergency call

Concept

In case of an emergency, an Emergency Request can be made through the system.

General information

Only press the SOS button in an emergency. For technical reasons, the Emergency Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable conditions.

Overview

SOS button at the interior mirror

Functional requirements

• The ignition is switched on.
• The Assist system is functional.
• The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated.

Initiating an Emergency Request automatically

Under certain conditions, for instance if the airbags trigger, an Emergency Request is automatically initiated immediately after an accident of corresponding severity. Auto-

matic Collision Notification is not affected by pressing the SOS button.

Initiating an Emergency Request manually

1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the button lights up green.
3. The LED is illuminated green when an Emergency Request has been initiated.
   If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been established.
4. The LED flashes green when a connection to the MINI Response Center has been established.

The MINI Response Center then makes contact with you and takes further steps to help you.

Even if you are unable to respond, the MINI Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circumstances.

For this, data is transmitted to the MINI Response Center which serve to determine the necessary rescue measures.

E.g., the current position of the vehicle, if it can be established.

If you can no longer hear the MINI Response Center through the loudspeakers, the hands-free system, for instance, may be broken. However, the MINI Response Center may still be able to hear you.

The MINI Response Center ends the Emergency Request.

Jump-starting

General information

If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles.

Safety information

DANGER

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.

WARNING

If the jumper cables are connected in the incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order during connection.

NOTICE

In the case of body contact between the two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jump-starting. There is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that no body contact occurs.

Preparation

1. Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles.

Starting aid terminals

The starting aid terminal in the engine compartment acts as the battery's positive terminal.

Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.

The body ground or a special nut acts as the battery negative terminal.

Connecting the cables

To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following procedure.

1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid terminal.

2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.

3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding

starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

1. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle.
2. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be started in the usual way.

If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before making another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

1. Let both engines run for several minutes.

2. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order.

Check the battery and recharge, if needed.

Tow-starting and towing

Safety information

WARNING

Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.

Steptronic transmission with driven front axle: transporting the vehicle

General information

The vehicle must not be towed if the front wheels are touching the ground.

Safety information

NOTICE

The vehicle can be damaged when towing the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is a risk of damage to property. Have vehicle transported only with lifted front axle or on a loading platform.

Pushing the vehicle

To remove a broken-down vehicle from the danger area, it can be pushed for a short distance.

Roll or push, refer to page 115, the vehicle.

Tow truck

Your vehicle should be transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
- Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.

Manual transmission

Towing or pushing the vehicle

A broken-down vehicle can be towed or pushed.

Roll or push, refer to page 112, the vehicle.

NOTICE

If manual unlocking of the parking brake is not possible, the vehicle cannot be moved or towed. There is a risk of damage to property. The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform.

Follow the following instructions:

- Make sure that the ignition is switched on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn signals, and wipers may be unavailable.

- Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn.

- When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. Consequently, more force needs to be applied when braking and steering.

– Larger steering wheel movements are required.

- The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle's response.

- Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h.

- Do not exceed a towing distance of 30 miles/50 km.

Tow truck

With driven front axle

Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

NOTICE

The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it.

There is a risk of damage to property.

• Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
• Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.

Towing other vehicles

General information

Switch on the hazard warning system, depending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear window.

Safety information

WARNING

If the approved gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not be possible to control the vehicle's response. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.

NOTICE

If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incorrectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur. There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.

Tow bar

The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles.

Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the following:

• Maneuvering capability is limited going around corners.
• The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset.

Tow rope

When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the vehicle to be towed without jerking.

Tow fitting

General information

The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried in the vehicle.

The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the vehicle.

The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 294, are together in the cargo area.

Use of the tow fitting:

• Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
• Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only.
• Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to property. Follow the notes on using the tow fitting.

Screw thread for tow fitting

Threaded holes for the tow fitting are located in the front and rear of the vehicle on the right side with respect to the direction of travel.

Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out.

Tow-starting

Steptronic transmission

Do not tow-start the vehicle.

Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to the Steptronic transmission.

Have the reasons for the starting difficulties corrected by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Manual transmission

If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 307. If the vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter, only tow-start while the engine is cold.

1. Switch on the hazard warning system and comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 97.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch pedal pressed and slowly release

the pedal. After the engine starts, immediately press on the clutch pedal again.

1. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope, and switch off the hazard warning system.
2. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Care

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

Washing the vehicle

General information

Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised.

Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle.

Steam jets or high-pressure washers

Safety information

NOTICE

When cleaning with high-pressure washers, components can be damaged due to the pressure or temperatures being too high. There is a risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient distance and do not spray too long continuously. Follow the operating instructions for the high-pressure washer.

Distances and temperature

• Maximum temperature: 140°F / 60°C .
• Minimum distance from sensors, cameras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm.

Automatic vehicle washes

Safety information

NOTICE

Water can penetrate in the windshield area due to high-pressure washers. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid high-pressure washers.

NOTICE

Improper use of automatic vehicle washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to property. Follow the following instructions:

• Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.
• Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to the chassis.
• Observe the tire width of the guide rail to avoid damage to tires and rims.
• Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to the exterior mirrors.
• Unscrew the rod antenna to avoid the rod antenna breaking off.
• Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain sensor to avoid damage to the wiper system.

- Do not treat the convertible top with wax. Ensure that a cycle without wax or a special cycle for convertibles is available to avoid damage to the convertible top.

Driving into a vehicle wash with a manual transmission

In vehicle washes, the vehicle must be able to roll freely.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 112.

Driving into a vehicle wash with a Steptronic transmission

In vehicle washes, the vehicle must be able to roll freely.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 115.

Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever position N. A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle.

Driving out of a vehicle wash

Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.

Start the engine, refer to page 98.

Headlights

Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.

Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance from insects, with shampoo and wash off with water.

Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

Completely remove all residues on the windows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.

Vehicle care

Vehicle care products

General information

MINI recommends using vehicle care and cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care products are available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

WARNING

Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health. There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the instructions on the container.

Vehicle paint

General information

Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural contaminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and extent of your vehicle care to these influences.

Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be re-

moved immediately to prevent the finish from being altered or discolored.

Safety information

WARNING

Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of the radar sensors and thereby result in a safety risk. There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to property. Have paint-work or paintwork repairs on bumpers of vehicles with radar sensors performed by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop only.

Matte finish

Only use cleaning and care products suitable for vehicles with matte finish.

Caring for the convertible top

General information

The appearance and life of the convertible top depend on correct care and operation.

Follow the following instructions:

• Clean roofliner with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly with water.
• Do not soak the roofliner.
• To avoid water stains, spots of mold, and chafe marks, do not keep the convertible top enclosed in its case for a long period of time. Do not fold up the convertible top or stow it in its case when it is wet or icy.
• Remove any water stains that have appeared on the roofliner using a microfiber cloth and an interior cleaner.

• When the vehicle is parked in enclosed areas for lengthy periods, ensure that the area is well ventilated.

• Park the vehicle in the shade to protect it from intensive solar radiation so that color, rubber, and fabric are not affected.

• Remove bird droppings immediately as their corrosive effect will otherwise attack the convertible top and damage the rubber seals.
• Hard to remove tree sap or bird drop- pings can be removed from the convertible top with special tree sap re- mover and a soft brush.

Safety information

NOTICE

Spot remover, paint thinner, solvents, gasoline or similar can damage the convertible top or the rubber coating. There is a risk of damage to property. To remove spots on the convertible top, use only suitable cleaning agents, for instance special convertible top cleaning agent.

Cleaning the convertible top

To remove heavy soiling, especially for light colored convertible tops, use a special convertible top cleaner.

Proceed as follows when cleaning:

1. Spray the convertible top with the convertible top cleaner. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.
2. Make the convertible top cleaner foam up using a well saturated sponge, moving it in circular motions.
3. Finish washing the vehicle in the vehicle wash or rinse with ample amounts of water. Follow notes regarding automatic washing systems or vehicle washes.

Treat the convertible top with an impregnating agent after it has been washed three to five times.

Suitable cleaning agents and care products are available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Leather care

Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface.

To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, clean leather and provide leather care roughly every two months.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently because soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface.

Upholstery material care

General information

Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum cleaner.

If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.

Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously.

Safety information

NOTICE

Open Velcro ^® fasteners on articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of damage to property. Ensure that any Velcro ^® fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels

When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 °F/60 °C. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.

Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disc.

After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry them. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

Chrome surfaces

Carefully clean components such as the radiator grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, particularly when they have been exposed to road salt.

Rubber components

Environmental influences can cause surface soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning.

Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing vehicle care products in order to avoid damage or noises.

Fine wood parts

Clean fine wood facing and fine wood components only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Plastic components

NOTICE

Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to property. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly with water.

Plastic components are e.g.:

• Imitation leather surfaces.
• Light lenses.
• Instrument cluster cover.
• Matt black spray-coated components.
• Painted parts in the car's interior.
  Clean with a microfiber cloth.
  Dampen cloth lightly with water.

Safety belts

WARNING

Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the safety belts.

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles.

Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats

WARNING

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning.

Floor mats can be removed from the car's interior for cleaning.

If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.

Sensor/camera lenses

To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent.

Displays/Screens

NOTICE

Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any kind can damage the surface of displays and screens. There is a risk of damage to property. Clean with a clean, anti-static microfiber cloth.

NOTICE

The surface of displays can be damaged with improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do not use any scratching materials.

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

Long-term vehicle storage

When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, special measures must be taken. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

REFERENCE

Technical data 322

Appendix 325

License Texts and Certifications 326

Everything from A to Z 350

Technical data

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes all standard, country-specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your vehicle,

e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.

General information

The technical data and specifications in this Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, for instance due to the selected special equipment, country version or country-specific measurement method. Detailed

values can be found in the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Dimensions

The dimensions can vary depending on the model version, equipment or country-specific measurement method.

The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, for instance a roof an-

tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for instance due to the selected special equipment, tires, load and chassis version.

MINI Convertible

Width with mirrors inches/mm 76.1/1,932

Width without mirrors inches/mm 68/1,727

Height inches/mm 55.7/1,415

Length inches/mm 151.1-152.5/3,837-3,874

Wheelbase inches/mm 98.2/2,495

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 35.5/10.8

Weights

MINI Cooper Convertible

Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,691/1,674
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,739/1,696
Load lbs/kg 710/322
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,011/912
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,070/939
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,770/803

MINI Cooper S Convertible

Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,849/1,746
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,889/1,764
Load lbs/kg 780/354
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,110/957
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,150/975
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,790/812

MINI John Cooper Works Convertible

Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,900/1,769
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,940/1,787
Load lbs/kg 800/363
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,121/962

MINI John Cooper Works Convertible

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,169/984

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,821/826

Capacities

MINI Convertible US gal/liters Notes

Fuel tank, approx. 11.6/44.0 Fuel quality, refer to

page 260.

Appendix

Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehicle are listed here.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

These chapters of the printed Owner's

Manual contain updates made after the edi-

torial deadline:

- Information: Data storage, refer to page 13.

License Texts and Certifications

Alarm System

Canada

EQUIPMENT AUTHORIZATION is hereby issued to the named GRANTEE, and is VALID ONLY for the equipment identified hereon for use under the Commission's Rules and Regulations listed below.

FCC ID.: P30001692

Name of Grantee: META System S.p.A.

Equipment Class: Part 15 Low Power Communication Device Transmitter

Notes: Microwave Sensor for intrusion and movement detection

FCC Rule Parts: 15c

Frequency Range (MHZ): 5784.0 - 5784.0

China

Radio Transmission Equipment

Type Approval Certificate

In accordance with the provisions on the Radio Regulations of the people's Republic of China, the radio transmission equipment, after examination, conforms to the provisions with its CMIIT ID: 2012DJ3855

Equipment Name: 超②②(UWB) 无②②②射②

Equipment Type: MUW II

Main Functions: 数据②②

Modulation Mode: PM

Main Technical Parameters

Frequency Range: 3.6-6.0 GHz

Frequency Tolerance: ---

Transmitting Power: ≤ -70 dBm/MHz (EIRP)

Occupied Bandwidth: 500 MHz

Spurious Emission Limits: ≤ -30 dBm

Europe

European Union: Declaration of Conformity

Hereby, Meta System S.p.A. declares that Microwave module Model MUW II is in compliance with Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU Declaration of Conformity is available at the following internet address: https://docs.meta-system.it/

Technical information

Frequency Bands in which the radio equipment operates:

5725 MHz - 5874 MHz <25mW e.i.r.p.

Manufacturer and Address

Manufacturer: Meta System S.p.A.

Address: Via Galimberti 5, 42124 Reggio Emilia, Italy

Български

Hereby, Meta System S.p.A. declares that Model MUW II is in compliance with Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU Declaration of Conformity is available at the following internet address: https://docs.metasystem.it/

Español

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept all interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Body Domain Controller

Europe

European Union: Declaration of Conformity

Hereby, LEAR Corporation declares that the radio equipment type TTRBDCLR01, TTRFEMLR01 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: http://www.lear.com/Products/Declaration-of-Conformity

Technical information

Frequency Band: 125 kHz

Maximum Magnetic Field Strength: 45.3dBμA/m

Manufacturer and Address

Manufacturer: LEAR Corporation holding Spain S.L.U.

Address: C/ Fusters, 54 - 43800 Valls(Tarra-gona), Spain

Phone: [phone]

Български

Hereby, LEAR Corporation declares that the radio equipment type TTRBDCLR01, TTRFEMLR01 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: http://www.lear.com/Products/Declaration-of-Conformity

Español

European Union: Declaration of Conformity

Hereby, Alpine Electronics, Inc. declares that the radio equipment type BIS01 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Technical information

Frequency Band: 2.5 GHz

Output Power : 8 dBm

Manufacturer and Address

Manufacturer: Alpine Electronics, Inc.

Address: 20-1, Yoshima Industrial Park, Iwaki, Fukushima 970-1192 Japan

Phone: [phone]

Български

Hereby, Alpine Electronics declares that the radio equipment type BIS01 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: http://www.alpine.com/e/research/

Español

Mexico

Russia, Kazakhstan, Belarus

South Korea

Low Power radio frequency electric machinery was qualified by Type Approval, not get permission from authority; the company, business or user can't arbitrarily change frequency, increase power or modify feature or function of original design.

2.

Use of low power radio frequency electric machinery can't affect flight safety and interfere with legal communication; once discover the interfered phenomenon, it should stop immediately and improve to no interference and then could continue to use.

The preceding legal communication is radio communication which follows Telecommunication Act to operate.

Low power radio frequency electric machinery must tolerate interference from legal communication or electric machinery apparatus of industry, science and medical radiation.

USA, Canada

USA (FCC) and Canada (IC)

Register model name:BIS01

Product code: RB00010A

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). (②)

Information regarding Open Source Software Licenses

The “IwIP – A Lightweight TCP/IP stack” included in some products is licensed under the “BSD licence”. A copy of that license in the English original version with a copy-

right notice, a disclaimer of warranty, and an exclusion of liability is included below. Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Swedish Institute of Computer Science. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Remote Control

Argentina

FCC § 15.19 Labelling requirements

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC § 15.21 Information to user

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Europe

European Union: Declaration of Conformity

Hereby, Hella KGaA Hueck & Co. declares that the radio equipment type IDGNG1 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: www.hella.com/bmw

Technical information

Operating frequency: 433,05 MHz - 434,78 MHz

Maximum output power: <10 mW (ERP)

Manufacturer and Address

Manufacturer: Hella KGaA Hueck & Co.

Address: Beckumer Str. 130, 59555 Lippstadt / Germany

Tel.: [phone]

Български

Hereby, Hella KGaA Hueck & Co. declares that the radio equipment type IDGNG1 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: www.hella.com/bmw

Español

201-135124

Mexico

COFETEL: RLVBHEID13-0912

Marca: Hella

Modelo (s): IDGNG1

TRA REGISTERED No: ER0107463/13

DEALER No: DA0053436/10

USA

FCC § 15.19 Labelling requirements

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC § 15.21 Information to user

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Australia/New Zealand

N1374

Canada

IC: 7812D-TIS07

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

China

In accordance with the provisions on the Radio Regulations of the people's Republic of China, the radio transmission equipment, after examination, conforms to the provisions with its CMIIT ID: 2013DJ7376

Europe

European Union: Declaration of Conformity

Hereby, Continental declares that the radio equipment type TIS-07 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: http://continental-homologation.com/bmw

Technical information

Continental: Frequency band: 433.92 MHz Maximum transmitter power: -17 dBm

Manufacturer and Address

Manufacturer: Continental Automotive GmbH

Address: Siemensstrasse 12, D-93055 Regensburg

Čeština

Hereby, Continental declares that the radio equipment type TIS-07 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: http://continental-homologation.com/bmw

Español

A. The use of this product does not need a wireless operation license.
B. The product does not include an RF disturbance protection, and should not disturb other licensed products.

C. It is forbidden to replace the antenna or to make any change in this product.

Russia

C-DE-ML05.H01232

South Africa

TA-2016/351

South Korea

Continental S180052056

KCC-CRM-TAL-S180052056

USA

FCC ID: KR5TIS-07

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Transmitter/Receiver

Europe

European Union: Declaration of Conformity

Continental:

Hereby, Continental declares that the radio equipment type FBD-3 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: http://continental-homologation.com/bmw

Technical information

Continental FBD-3:

• Frequency Band: 433 MHz
• Maximum Power: max.0.63 mW (EN 62479)
• Report: T39156-03-00HS_62479

Manufacturer and Address

Manufacturer: Continental Automotive GmbH

Address: Siemensstrasse 12, 93055 Regensburg, Germany

Phone: [phone]

Čeština

Hereby, Continental, declares that this Radio Transceiver is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EC. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: http://continental-homologation.com/bmw

Español

The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:

FCC ID:

• LX8766S.
• LX8766E.
• LX8CAS.
• LX8CAS2.
• MYTCAS4.

Compliance statement:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Everything from A to Z

Index

A

ABS, Antilock Brake System 164

Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 119

Accessories and parts 12

ACC, see Camera-based cruise control 169

Activated-charcoal filter 195

Activation times, parked-car ventilation 196

Active Cruise Control, see Camera-based cruise control 169

Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 155

Adaptive brake lights, see Brake force display 162

Adaptive chassis 166

Additives, engine oil types 288

Adjustments, steering wheel 91

After washing vehicle 314

Airbags 143

Airbags, indicator and warning light 145

Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 190, 194

Air conditioner 189

Air conditioning 190, 193

Air, dehumidifying, see Air conditioning 190, 193

Air distribution, manual 191, 195

Air flow, air conditioner 191

Air flow, automatic climate control 194

Air pressure, tires 262

Air vents, see Ventilation 195

Alarm system 71

Alarm triggering 71

Alarm, unintentional 73

All around the interior mirror 41

All-season tires, see Winter tires 270

Always Open Timer, Control Display 136

Always Open Timer, Onboard Computer 132

AM/FM station 234

Antifreeze, washer fluid 110

Antilock Brake System, ABS 164

Anti-slip control, see DSC 164

Anti-theft protection, lug bolts 278

Approach control warning with city light braking function 156

Approved axle load 323

Ash tray 203

Assistance when driving off 167

Audio 242

Audio playback, Bluetooth 242

Audio playback, pause 230

AUTO intensity 194

Automatic climate control 192

Automatic Curb Monitor 90

Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger airbags 145

Automatic headlight control 138

Automatic locking 71

Automatic Service Request 252

Automatic transmission with Steptronic 112

Automatic unlocking 71

Automatic vehicle wash 313

AUTO program, automatic climate control 193

AUTO program, intensity 194

Auto Start/Stop function 100

Auto washing 313

Average fuel consumption 131

Average speed 131

Axle loads, weights 323

B

Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 84

Backrest, seats 83

Balance, sound settings 232

Band-aids, see First-aid kit 305

Bass, sound settings 232

Battery Guard, Teleservice 253

Battery replacement, vehicle battery 303

Battery, vehicle 303

Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 308

Belts, safety belts 85

Beverage holder, cup holder 207

Bluetooth audio 242

Bluetooth connection 51

Bonus range, GREEN Mode 224

Bottle holder, see Cup holder 207

Brake assistant 164

Brake discs, break-in 216

Brake force display 162

Brake lights, brake force display 162

Brake pads, break-in 216

Braking, information 218

Breakdown assistance 305

Break-in 216

Brightness of Control Display 48

Bug light 296

Bulb replacement 295

Bulb replacement, front 296, 298

Bulb replacement, rear 298

Bulb replacement, side 302

Bulbs and lights 295

Button, SOS 306

Button, Start/Stop 97

Bypassing, see Jump-starting 307

C

California Proposition 65 Warning 12

Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelligent Safety 155

Camera-based cruise control 169

Camera lenses, care 317

Camera, rearview camera 181

Can holder, see Cup holder 207

Care, displays 317

Care, vehicle 314

Care, washing the vehicle 313

Cargo area 208

Cargo area, enlarging 210

Cargo area, loading 209

Cargo area partition 211

Cargo area, storage compartments 210

Cargo, stowing and securing 209

Cargo straps 210

Carpet, care 317

Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas system 217

CBS Condition Based Service 292

Center armrest 206

Center console 40

Central Information Display (CID) 42

Central Information Display (CID) operating concept 42

Central instrument cluster, LED ring 134

Central locking system, unlocking, from inside 66

Central screen, see Control Display 43

Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 11

Changing parts 294

Changing the entertainment source 230

Changing wheels 276

Changing wheels/tires 269

Chassis number, see Vehicle identification number 17

Check Control 121

Checking the oil level electronically 286

Children, seating position 93

Children, transporting safely 93

Child restraint system 93

Child restraint system LATCH 95

Child restraint systems, mounting 94

Child seat, mounting 94

Child seats 93

Chrome parts, care 316

Cigarette lighter 203

Cleaning, displays 317

Climate control 189, 192

Coasting 225

Coasting with engine decoupled, coasting 225

Coasting with idling engine 225

Combination switch, see Turn signals 103

Combi switch, see Wiper system 104, 107

Comfort Access 66

Comfort entry 61

Compartments in the doors 206

Compass 200

Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 51

Compressor 271

Computer, see Onboard Computer 130

Condensation on windows 195

Condensation under the vehicle 219

Condition Based Service CBS 292

Conference, see Calls with multiple parties 249

Configuring driving program 167

Confirmation signal 71

Connecting device 50

Connecting mobile phone 50

Connecting smartphone 50

Connecting telephone 50

Connections 50

Consumption, see Current consumption 127

Contacts 250

Continued driving with a flat tire 151, 154

Control Display 43

Control Display, settings 47

Controller 44

Controller operation 45

Control systems, driving stability 164

Convenient closing with the remote control 62

Convenient opening 61

Convertible,convertible top 76

Convertible mode, automatic climate control 194

Convertible program, automatic climate control 194

Convertible, roof 76

Convertible top 76

Convertible top, care 315

Convertible top, cargo area partition 78

Convertible top, emergency operation 78

Convertible top, rollover protection system 147

Coolant 290

Cooling, maximum 193

Cooling system 290

Cornering light 139

Corrosion on brake discs 219

Cosmetic mirror 202

Coupling, see Pairing 50

Courtesy lights during unlocking 61

Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 62

Cruise control 175

Cruise control, active 169

Cruise control with distance control, see Camera-based cruise control 169

Cruise control without distance control, see Cruise control 175

Cruising range 126

Cup holder 207

Current consumption 127

Customer support 254

D

Damage, tires 268

Dashboard 202

Data memory 13

Data protection, settings 49

Data, technical 322, 324

Date 47

Date display 126

Daytime running lights 139

DCC, see Cruise control 175

Decorative trim 202

Defrosting, see Defrosting the windows 191

Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 195

Defrosting the windows 191

Dehumidifying, air 190, 193

Deleting personal data 50

Deletion of personal data 50

Device list 50

Digital clock 126

Digital compass 200

Digital radio, see HD Radio reception 235

Dimensions 322

Dimmable exterior mirrors 90

Dimmable interior mirror 91

Direction indicator, see Turn signals 103

Display, electronic, instrument cluster 121

Display, engine temperature 132

Display, GREEN Mode 222

Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 141

Displays 120

Displays, care 317

Disposal, coolant 291

Disposal, vehicle battery 304

Distance control, see PDC 177

Drive-off assistant 167

Drive-off assistant, see DSC 164

Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 155

Driver profiles 69

Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driving Modes switch 166

Driving Excitement, SPORT 133

Driving instructions, break-in 216

Driving mode, GREEN 222

Driving modes 166

Driving notes, general 217

Driving on racetracks 220

Driving stability control systems 164

Driving tip, GREEN tip 224

Driving tips 217

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 164

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 165

Dynamic damping, see Adaptive chassis 166

Dynamic Stability Control DSC 164

Dynamic Traction Control DTC 165

E

Easy-Load function, see Loading aid 209

Electronic displays, instrument cluster 121

Electronic oil measurement 286

Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 164

Emergency operation, convertible top 78

Emergency release, fuel filler flap 259

Emergency Request 306

Emergency service, see Breakdown assistance 305

Emergency unlocking, tailgate 69

Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 118

Emergency wheel, compact wheel, see Emergency wheel 281

Energy control 127

Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 100

Engine, automatic switch-off 100

Engine compartment 283

Engine compartment, working in 284

Engine coolant 290

Engine idling when driving, coasting 225

Engine oil 286

Engine oil, adding 287

Engine oil change 289

Engine oil filler neck 287

Engine oil types to add 288

Engine start, jump-starting 307

Engine start, see Starting the engine 98

Engine stop 99

Engine temperature, display 132

Entering a vehicle wash 313

Entertainment, control elements 230

Equipment, interior 198

Error displays, see Check Control 121

ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 164

Exchanging wheels/tires 269

Exhaust gas system 217

Exiting a vehicle wash 313

Expanding the cargo area volume 211

Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 90

Exterior mirrors 89

Exterior mirrors, Automatic Curb Monitor 90

Exterior mirrors, malfunction 90

External start 307

External temperature display 126

External temperature warning 126

Eyes for securing cargo 210

F

Fader, sound settings 232

Failure message, see Check Control 121

False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 73

Fan, see Air flow 191, 194

Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 85

Filler neck for engine oil 287

Fine wood, care 316

First-aid kit 305

Flat tire, changing wheels 276

Flat Tire Monitor FTM 152

Flat tire, repairing 271

Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 148

Flat tire, warning light 149, 153

Flooding 217

Floor carpet, care 317

Floor mats, care 317

FM/AM station 234

Fogged up windows 191

Fold-away position, windshield wipers 106, 109

Fold back rear seat backrests 210

Foot brake 218

For Your Own Safety 11

Front airbags 143

Front fog lights 140

Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deactivation 145

Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 146

Front seats 83

FTM Flat Tire Monitor 152

Fuel 260

Fuel cap 258

Fuel consumption, see Average fuel consumption 131

Fuel filler flap 258

Fuel gauge 125

Fuel quality 260

Fuel recommendation 260

Fuel, tank capacity 324

Fuse 304

G

Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal Remote Control 198

Gasoline 260

Gear shift indicator 128

General driving notes 217

General settings 47

Glare shield 202

Glove compartment 205

Gong, volume equalization 232

GPS geolocation, vehicle position 48

GREEN bonus range 224

GREEN Mode 222

GREEN - program, driving dynamics 166

GREEN tip, driving tip 224

Gross vehicle weight, approved 323

Ground clearance 219

H

Halogen headlights 296

Handbrake, see Parking brake 102

Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 199

Hands-free system 250

Hazard warning flashers 305

HD Radio 235

Headlight control, automatic 138

Headlight courtesy delay feature 138

Headlight flasher 103

Headlight glass 296

Headlights, care 314

Head restraints, front 87

Head restraints, rear 88

Head-up Display, shift point indicator 135

Head-up Display, sport displays 135

Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 209

High-beam Assistant 139

High beams 103

High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assistant 139

Hills 218

Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 167

Holder for beverages 207

HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Control 198

Homepage 10

Hood 284

Horn 38

Hot exhaust gas system 217

Hotline, see Customer support 254

Hydroplaning 217

I

Ice warning, see External temperature warning 126

Icy roads, see External temperature warning 126

Identification marks, tires 266

Identification number, see Vehicle identification number 17

Ignition off 97

Ignition on 97

Illuminated ring, central instrument cluster 134

Indication of a flat tire 149, 153

Indicator light, see Check Control 121

Individual air distribution 191, 195

Individual settings, see Driver profiles 69

Inflation pressure, tires 262

Inflation pressure warning, tires 152

Info Display, see Onboard Computer 130

Information 10

Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 148

Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 153

Instrument cluster 120

Instrument cluster, electronic displays 121

Instrument lighting 141

Integrated key 65

Integrated Universal Remote Control 198

Intelligent emergency call 306

Intelligent Safety 155

Intended use 11

Intensity, AUTO program 194

Interior equipment 198

Interior lights 141

Interior lights during unlocking 61

Interior lights with the vehicle locked 62

Interior mirror 41, 89

Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 91

Interior mirror, compass 200

Interior mirror, manually dimmable 91

Interior motion sensor 73

Internet site 10

Interval display, service requirements 127

Interval mode 104, 108

In the vicinity of the center console 40

In the vicinity of the steering wheel 38 iPod/iPhone 242

J

Jacking points for the vehicle jack 279

Jam protection system, windows 74

Jump-starting 307

K

Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 66

Key, see Integrated key 65

Key, see Remote control 60

Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 115

Knee airbag 144

L

Label on recommended tires 270

Label, runflat tires 271

Language, on the Control Display 47

Lashing eyes 210

LATCH child restraint fixing system 95

Launch Control 119

Leather, care 316

LED ring, central instrument cluster 134

LEDs, light-emitting diodes 295

Letters and numbers, entering 46

Light 137

Light-alloy wheels, care 316

Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 295

Lighter 203

Lighting 137

Light replacement 295

Light replacement, front 296, 298

Light replacement, rear 298

Light replacement, side 302

Lights and bulbs 295

Light switch 137

List of all messages 49

Load 209

Loading 208

Loading aid 209

Location, vehicle position 48

Locking, automatic 71

Locking, from inside 66

Locking, settings 70

Low beams 137

Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assistant 139

Lower back support, mechanical 84

Lug bolt lock 278

Lumbar support, mechanical 84

M

Maintenance 292

Maintenance requirements 292

Maintenance, service requirements 127

Maintenance system, MINI 292

Make-up mirror 202

Malfunction displays, see Check Control 121

Manual air distribution 191, 195

Manual air flow 191, 194

Manual mode, transmission 116

Manual operation, fuel filler flap 259

Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Control 179

Manual operation, rearview camera 181

Manual transmission 111

Manufacturer of the MINI 11

Matte finish 315

Maximum cooling 193

Maximum speed, display 128

Maximum speed, winter tires 270

Measurement, units of 48

Mechanical key 65

Medical kit 305

Menu in instrument cluster 130

Menus, Central Information Display (CID) 45

Messages 49

Messages, see Check Control 121

Microfilter 191, 195

MID - program, driving dynamics 166

MINI driving modes 166

MINI logo projection during unlocking 61

MINI maintenance system 292

Minimum tread, tires 268

MINI Teleservices 252

Mirrors 89

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle 217

Mobile phone 248

Mobile phone, operation 248

Mobility System 271

Modifications, technical, see For Your Own Safety 11

Moisture in headlight 296

Monitor, see Control Display 43

Mounting of child restraint systems 94

MP3 player, see Audio 242

Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 38

N

Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints 87

Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints 88

Neutral cleaner, see Wheel cleaner 316

New wheels and tires 269

0

OBD Onboard Diagnostics 293

Obstacle marking, rearview camera 182

Octane rating, see Recommended fuel grade 261

Odometer 125

Oil 286

Oil, adding 287

Oil change 289

Oil change interval, service requirements 127

Oil filler neck 287

Oil types to add, engine 288

Old batteries, disposal 304

Onboard Computer 130

Onboard Diagnostics OBD 293

Onboard literature, printed 56

Onboard vehicle tool kit 294

On-call service, see Breakdown assistance 305

Opening and closing 60

Opening, from inside 66

Operating menus, Central Information Display (CID) 42

Operation via the Controller 45

Optional equipment 11

Owner's Manual media 56

Owner's Manual, printed 56

P

Paint, vehicle 314

Panic alarm, see Panic mode 72

Panic mode 72

Parallel parking assistant 184

Park Distance Control PDC 177

Parked-car ventilation 196

Parked vehicle, condensation 219

Parking aid, see PDC 177

Parking assistant 184

Parking brake 102

Parking lights 137

Parts and accessories 12

Passenger's side mirror, tilting 90

Pathway lines, rearview camera 182

Pause, audio playback 230

PDC Park Distance Control 177

Performance Control 166

Personal profile, see Driver profiles 69

Person warning with City light braking function 159

Phone conference, see Calls with multiple parties 249

Plastic, care 317

PostCrash — iBrake 162

Power failure 304

Power windows 73

Pressure, tires 262

Pressure warning, tires 152

Printed onboard literature 56

Profiles, see Driver profiles 69

Programmable memory buttons, Central Information Display (CID) 46

Protective function, windows 74

Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 44

R

Racetrack operation 220

Radiator fluid 290

Radio 234

Radio, adjusting the volume 230

Radio, control elements 230

Radio Data System RDS 234

Radio, muting 230

Radio-operated remote control, see Remote control 60

Radio-ready state 98

Radio, see Changing the entertainment source 230

Radio, tone settings 232

Rain sensor 104, 108

Ratchet straps 210

RDS Radio Data System 234

Rear lights 298

Rear luggage rack 219

Rearview camera 180

Rear window defroster 191, 195

Recirculated-air filter 195

Recirculated-air mode 190, 194

Recommended fuel grade 261

Recommended tire brands 270

Refueling 258

Remaining range 126

Remote control, additional 64

Remote control, loss 64

Remote control, malfunction 64

Remote control, opening/closing 60

Remote control, replacing the battery 63

Remote control, universal 198

Renaming a station 235

Replacing parts 294

Replacing the battery, remote control 63

Replacing wheels/tires 269

Reporting safety malfunctions 17

RES CNCL button, see Camera-based cruise control 169

RES CNCL button, see Cruise control 175

Reserve warning, see Range 126

Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 148

Retreaded tires 270

Roadside Assistance, see Breakdown assistance 305

Roadside parking lights 138

Rolling code hand-held transmitter 199

Rollover protection system 147

RON recommended fuel grade 261

Roof load capacity 323

Roof, see Convertible top 76

RSC Runflat System Component, see Runflat tires 271

Rubber components, care 316

Runflat tires 271

S

Safe braking 218

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat 87

Safety belts 85

Safety belts, care 317

Safety belts, rear 87

Safety systems, airbags 143

Satellite radio 236

Saving fuel 221

Screen, see Control Display 43

Screwdriver 294

Sealant, see Mobility System 271

Seat heating, front 85

Seating position for children 93

Seats, front 83

Securing cargo 209

Selection list in instrument cluster 130

Sensors, care 317

Service and warranty 13

Service Request 253

Service requirements, Condition Based Service CBS 292

Service requirements, display 127

Servotronic 167

SET button, see Camera-based cruise control 169

SET button, see Cruise control 175

Settings, locking/unlocking 70

Settings, mirrors 89

Settings on the Control Display 47

Shift gate rotary switch 166

Shift paddles on the steering wheel 117

Shift point indicator, Head-up Display 135

Side airbag 143

Signaling, horn 38

Signals when unlocking 71

Sitting safely 83

Size 322

Smartphone, operation 248

SMS text messages, supplementary 125

Snow chains 276

Socket 203

Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnostics 293

SOS button 306

Sound output 230

Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 281

Speed, average 131

Speed Limit Info 128

Speed Limit Info, Onboard Computer 132

Speed limits, display 128

Speed Volume, volume equalization 232

Speed warning 133

Sport displays 133

Sport displays, Head-up Display 135

SPORT program, driving dynamics 167

Sport program, transmission 115

Stability control systems 164

Standard equipment 11

Start/stop, automatic function 100

Start/Stop button 97

Starting the engine 98

Station, AM/FM 234

Stations, stored 241

Station, storing 234

Status information, Central Information Display (CID) 43

Status of Owner's Manual 11

Status, vehicle 136

Steering assistance 167

Steering wheel, adjusting 91

Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic transmission 112

Steptronic Sport transmission with double clutch, see Steptronic transmission 112

Steptronic transmission 112

Steptronic transmission with double clutch, see Steptronic transmission 112

Stopping the engine 99

Storage compartments 205

Storage, tires 270

Storing the vehicle 318

Stowing and securing cargo 209

Suitable devices 51

Suitable mobile phones 51

Summer tires, tread 268

Sun visor 202

Supplementary Owner's Manuals 56

Supplementary SMS text messages 125

Switch for driving dynamics 166

Switching calls, see Calls with multiple parties 249

Switch, see Cockpit 38

Symbols 10

T

Tachometer 125

Tailgate 69

Tailgate, emergency unlocking 69

Tailgate via remote control 62

Tail lights 298

Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 11

Technical data 322, 324

Telephone 248

Telephone conference, see Calls with multiple parties 249

Telephone, operation 248

Teleservice Battery Guard 253

Teleservice Report 253

Teleservices 252

Temperature, air conditioner 190

Temperature, automatic climate control 192

Temperature display for external temperature 126

Temperature, engine 132

Terminal, starting aid 308

Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 71

Thigh support 84

Tilt alarm sensor 73

Tilting, passenger's side mirror 90

Time 47

Tire damage 268

Tire identification marks 266

Tire inflation pressure 262

Tire inflation pressure monitor, see FTM 152

Tire pressure 262

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 148

Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 271

Tires, changing 269

Tire sealant, see Mobility System 271

Tires, everything on wheels and tires 262

Tires, runflat 271

Tire tread 268

Tone 232

Tools 294

Total vehicle weight 323

Towing 308

Tow-starting 308

TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 148

Traction control 165

TRACTION driving mode, driving dynamics 165

Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 118

Transmission lock, releasing manually 117

Transmission, manual transmission 111

Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 112

Transporting children safely 93

Tread, tires 268

Treble, sound settings 232

Trip computer 132

Triple turn signal activation 103

Trip odometer 125

Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 125

Trunk, cargo area partition 211

Trunk, emergency unlocking 69

Turning radius lines, rearview camera 182

Turn signal, front 296, 298

Turn signal, indicator light 123

Turn signal, side 302

Turn signals, operation 103

Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 298

U

Unintentional alarm 73

Units of measurement 48

Universal remote control 198

Unlocking, automatic 71

Unlocking, settings 70

Updates made after the editorial deadline 11

Upholstery care 316

USB audio interface 242

USB connection 53

USB interface, position in vehicle 204

USB port, see USB interface 204

Use, intended 11

V

Vanity mirror 202

Vehicle battery 303

Vehicle battery, replacing 303

Vehicle, break-in 216

Vehicle care 314

Vehicle care products 314

Vehicle features and options 11

Vehicle identification number 17

Vehicle jack 279

Vehicle key, see Remote control 60

Vehicle paint 314

Vehicle position, vehicle location 48

Vehicle status 136

Vehicle storage 318

Vehicle wash 313

Vehicle, washing 313

Ventilation 195

Ventilation, see Parked-car ventilation 196

VIN, see Vehicle identification number 17

Voice command response 251

Volume equalization 232

W

Warning and indicator lights, see Check Control 121

Warning displays, see Check Control 121

Warning messages, see Check Control 121

Warning triangle 305

Warranty 11

Washer fluid 110

Washer nozzles, windshield 106, 109

Washing the vehicle 313

Water on roads 217

Weights 323

Welcome lights 138

Welcome lights during unlocking 61

Wheel cleaner 316

Wheels, changing 269

Wheels, everything on wheels and tires 262

Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 152

Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 148

Wind deflector 81

Window defroster, rear 191, 195

Windows, powered 73

Windshield cleaning system 104, 107

Windshield defroster 191, 195

Windshield washer fluid 110

Windshield washer nozzles 106, 109

Windshield wipers, fold-away position 106, 109

Windshield wipers, see Wiper system 104, 107

Winter storage, care 318

Winter tires, suitable tires 270

Winter tires, tread 268

Wiper blades, replacing 294

Wiper fluid 110

Wiper system 104, 107

Wood, care 316

Word match concept, navigation 42

Wrench 294

Y

Your dealer's service center 253

California Proposition 65 Warning

WARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-high-way motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.

Your customized information about the vehicle in an app. Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.

Download on the App Store

GET IT ON Google Play

01402723749 ue